ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 GLACIAL TILL TASTING … CC-1_180330.pdfC. Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For...

ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 CC-1-1

ADDENDUM NO. CC-1 GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM RENOVATION AND ADDITION ASHLAND, NEBRASKA DLR GROUP PROJECT NO. 10-17138-00 COMBINED CONTRACT MARCH 30, 2018 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Amend the Project Manual and Drawings to the above referenced project as follows:

PROJECT MANUAL

ITEM NO. 1. DOCUMENT 000010 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section 220525 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.

B. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section 221315 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING.

C. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section 223100 – DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS.

D. DIVISION 22, PLUMBING. Add Section 226650 – CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING.

E. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section 230900 – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.

F. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS.

G. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add Section 233113 – METAL DUCTS.

H. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add SECTION 237416.11 – PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS.

I. DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING. Add SECTION 238236 – FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS.

ITEM NO. 2. SECTION 042000 – UNIT MASONRY

A. Article 1.9. Delete the following

“1) Standard Pattern, split-face finish”

B. Article 1.9. Add the following “1) Standard Pattern, split-face finish; smooth face finish at top course in

contact with parapet coping”

GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM 10-17138-00 RENOVATION AND ADDITION ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


ITEM NO. 3. SECTION 220525 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Add Section 220525, per Attachment No. 1.

ITEM NO. 4. SECTION 221315 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING


ITEM NO. 5. SECTION 223100 – DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS


ITEM NO. 6. SECTION 226650 – CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING

A. Add Section 226650, per Attachment No. 4. ITEM NO. 7. SECTION 230900 – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS


ITEM NO. 8. SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS


ITEM NO. 9. SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS


ITEM NO. 10. SECTION 237416.11 – PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Add Section 237416.11, per Attachment No. 8.

ITEM NO. 11. SECTION 238236 – FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS


DRAWINGS

ITEM NO. 1. DRAWING A0.1 – GENERAL NOTES, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & WALL TYPES

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A0.1.

ITEM NO. 2. DRAWING A1.1 – FLOOR PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN


ITEM NO. 3. DRAWING A1.2 – FLOOR PLAN, UPPER LEVEL




ITEM NO. 4. DRAWING A4.1 – ROOF PLAN


ITEM NO. 5. DRAWING A7.3 – WALL SECTION DETAILS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A7.3. ITEM NO. 6. DRAWING A10.1– GENERAL DETAILS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing A10.1

ITEM NO. 7. DRAWING M1.1 – HVAC PLAN, BASEMENT & MAIN LEVEL

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M1.1.

ITEM NO. 8. DRAWING M1.2 – HVAC PLAN, UPPER & ROOF LEVELS

A. Delete Drawing M1.2 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M1.2.

ITEM NO. 9. DRAWING M5.1 – MECHANICAL SCHEDULES

A. Delete Drawing M5.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing M5.1. ITEM NO. 10. DRAWING P0.1 – PLUMBING PLAN, UNDERGROUND / BASEMENT LEVEL

A. Delete Drawing P0.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P0.1. ITEM NO. 11. DRAWING P1.1 – PLUMBING PLAN, MAIN & UPPER LEVELS

A. Delete Drawing P1.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P1.1. ITEM NO. 12. DRAWING P2.1 – PLUMBING LARGE SCALE PLANS

A. Delete Drawing P2.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P2.1. ITEM NO. 13. DRAWING P4.1 – PLUMBING WASTE AND VENT RISERS

A. Delete Drawing P4.1 in its entirety and substitute new Drawing P4.1.

ITEM NO. 14. DRAWING E2.1 – POWER PLANS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E2.1 ITEM NO. 15. DRAWING E3.1 – SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing E3.1

ITEM NO. 16. DRAWING E5.1 – ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE & GROUNDING DIAGRAM




ITEM NO. 17. DRAWING E7.2 – ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES


ITEM NO. 18 DRAWING S1.1 – FOUNDATION AND LOWER LEVEL FRAMING PLANS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S1.1. ITEM NO. 19 DRAWING S2.1 – UPPER LEVEL AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S2.1.

ITEM NO. 20 DRAWING S6.1 – STRUCTURAL DETAILS

A. Delete Drawing in its entirety and substitute new Drawing S6.1.

END OF ADDENDUM

GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM 10-17138-00

RENOVATION AND ADDITION CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 220525 - 1

SECTION 220525 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.

C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. ASTM A1011 - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability (formerly

ASTM A570).

E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials,

Design, and Manufacture.

F. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and

Application.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports

to building structure.

2. Division 21 Section on wet-pipe sprinkler system piping for fire-suppression pipe

hangers.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and

Supports."

ksloup

Addendum No. 1 - January 12, 2016

Attachment No. 1 to Addendum CC-1 dated March 30, 2018



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For selection and application, refer to MSS SP-69 except as

modified within this specification.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 220100 paragraph on shop drawing submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-

hanger shield insert indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping

supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics

of components and fabrication details.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for

each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those

performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for

this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and

support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied

finish.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insulation,

encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,

ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,

ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.

4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating

below ambient air temperature.

6. As an alternate to thermal-hanger shield inserts, provide “Klo-Shure®” Insulation

Couplings. This coupling is molded from a high strength, heat stabilized, flame retardant

“DuPont®” “Hytrel®” thermoplastic polyester elastomer. Coupling is available for drop-

in hangers and strut-mounted hangers. Website for this insulation coupling is

www.klo-shure.com.

2.2 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS (STRUT SYSTEMS)

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Anvil-Strut; Anvil International.

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

d. Flex-Strut Inc.

e. GS Metals Corp.

f. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

g. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

h. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


6. Hanger Rods: Machine-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel and carbon

steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

2.3 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. This Article applies to plumbing systems only.

B. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior

and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Additional hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe

size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for

insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections,

install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to

232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN100 to DN400), requiring up to 4 inches

(100 mm) of insulation.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 (DN15 to DN600), if little or no insulation is required.

4. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200).

5. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).

6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).

7. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN15 to DN50).

8. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN10 to DN200).

9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN10 to DN80).

10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to

DN750).

11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to

DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Above used to

support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor pipe

sizes 4 inches to 36 inches.

13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100

to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with

U-bolt to retain pipe. Above equivalent to Type 36, except U-bolt provided for retaining

pipe.

14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN65 to DN900), when vertical adjustment is required, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Above recommended for

stanchion type support where vertical adjustment is required; 2-1/2 inches to 36 inches.

15. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN25 to

DN750) in size, from two rods where longitudinal movement caused by expansion and

contraction might occur.

16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 20 (DN65 to DN500) in size, from a single rod where horizontal movement caused

by expansion and contraction might occur.

17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN50 to

DN1050) in size, where longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur and where vertical adjustment is not necessary.

18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN50

to DN600), where small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might

occur and where vertical adjustment is not necessary.

19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to

NPS 30 (DN50 to DN750), where vertical and lateral adjustment during installation

might be required in addition to provision for expansion and contraction.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Select size of vertical clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe.

Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated and

except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps:

a. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).

2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps:

a. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500), when longer ends are required for riser

clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide

copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper piping systems. Unless otherwise indicated

and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): To provide adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for

heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For higher temperature piping systems 120 to 450 deg F

(49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For higher temperature piping systems 120 to

450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Attachment to metal pan deck is not allowed! Select size of building

attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping

systems. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification

Sections, install the following types (do not attach to metal deck):

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete decking.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams where

loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For attachment to structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is

required tangent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light Duty (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium Duty (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (675 kg).

c. Heavy Duty (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1350 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For use on sides of steel beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams where flexibility at beam is

required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping

hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for

exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Unless otherwise indicated, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent

crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, constructed of 360-degree

insert of high-density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength,

water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation encased in

360-degree sheet metal shield. Assembly shall be same thickness as adjoining insulation.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Use where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads where vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from

trapeze support.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


8. Constant Supports: Constant supports are used where piping stress is critical. Used

where its necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, or on

to critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection,

hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following

types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building

structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and

support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal

piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.

Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space

attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and this specification.

Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed, fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Install fasteners according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe any anchors, and to facilitate action of

any expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option:

1) Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on

rollers.

2) “Klo-Shure®” Insulation Couplings.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option:

1) Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on

rollers.

2) “Klo-Shure®” Insulation Couplings.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch

(1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.3 SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS

A. Install hangers for horizontal pressurized piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes.

Maximum Hanger Spacing

Individual Perpendicular To Joist Parallel To Joist

Nominal Hanger Rod Std. Wt. Copper Std. Wt. Copper

Pipe Size Diameter Steel Tube Steel Tube

Up to 1½" 3/8" 6 Ft. 5 Ft. 6 Ft. 5 Ft.

2", 2½, 3" 1/2" 8 Ft. 8 Ft. 8 Ft. 8 Ft.

4" 5/8" 8 Ft. 8 Ft. 8 Ft. 8 Ft.

1. Support vertical pipe at each floor.

B. Install hangers for horizontal pipe with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes.

Individual

Pipe Material Hanger Rod Maximum Hanger Spacing

and Size Diameter Perpendicular to Joist Parallel To Joist

Cast Iron

Up to 4",

10' Length 1/2" 8 Ft. 8 Ft.

5' Length 1/2" 5 Ft. 5 Ft.

Cast Iron

6" 3/4" 4 Ft. 4 Ft.

Cast Iron

8" 3/4" 3 Ft. Not Permitted

Copper Tube

Up to 1" 3/8" 8 Ft. 8 Ft.

Copper Tube

1¼" to 2½" 3/8" 12 Ft. 12 Ft.

Copper Tube

3" 1/2" 12 Ft. 12 Ft.

1. Support vertical copper tube every 10 feet. Support other vertical drainage pipe at each

floor.

2. See structural details on sheet S6.1 for additional information. Space pipe support such

that maximum load does not exceed 150 lbs.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Trapeze hangers shall be installed using the same maximum hanger spacing defined in the

paragraphs above. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers,

spacing of the hangers shall be governed by the minimum spacing for any of the individual

pipes. The weight of the pipe and fluids shall in no case exceed 150 pounds per individual

trapeze hanger rod.

3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.5 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be

shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.

Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

(0.05 mm).



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 220525



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221315 - 1

SECTION 221315 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the followings systems:

1. Soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations

indicated.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems

specialties.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following

minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig (345 kPa).

1.4 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Cast iron soil pipe, fittings and couplings.

2. Solid wall PVC pipe, fittings and couplings.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA



A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to

ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective

trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International.

C. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be solid-wall PVC pipe and shall conform to ASTM D 2665,

drain, waste, and vent. All pipe and fittings shall be listed by NSF International.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cast Iron & PVC Soil Piping:

a. AB & I.

b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry.

c. Tyler Pipe.

C. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with

elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include

corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

D. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type

coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and

ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hubless Pipe and Fittings:

1. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe

Institute and be listed by NSF International.

2. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3. Couplings: Assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and

rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 and ASTM C 1277,

with stainless steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices;

and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve & bear the NSF Trademark.

1) Manufacturers:

a) ANACO.

b) Mission Rubber Co.

c) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2.3 COPPER TUBING

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,

solder-joint fittings.

2.4 SOLID-WALL PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping

and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for additional excavating, trenching, and

backfilling requirements.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may

be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each

size range:

1. NPS 1-1/4 through NPS 10 (DN 32 through DN 250): Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and

one of the following:

a. Couplings: Standard-duty, shielded.

2. NPS 1-1/4 through NPS 8 (DN 32 through DN 200): Copper DWV tube, copper

drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

3. PVC pipe: PVC piping is not allowed above ground!

C. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each

size range:

1. NPS 2 through NPS 15 (DN 50 through DN 375): Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket

fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

D. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 thru NPS 6 (DN 40 to DN 150) shall be

the following:

1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 33 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewer" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping

installation.

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers.

D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1/4 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping

3 inch and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping sizes

4 inches and larger.

2. Vent Piping: 1/16 inch per foot down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.

I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction and until smoke test(s) have been accomplished and witnessed by

the Commissioning Agent.

J. The PVC drain, waste, and vent piping systems shall be protected from chemical agents, fire-

stopping materials, thread sealant, plasticized-vinyl product of other aggressive chemical agents

not compatible with PVC compounds.

K. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint

construction.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-

alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

E. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. Provide transition piping support as detailed in the drawings.


A. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing

Specialties."

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,

and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside

leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with

water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From

15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not

drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps

filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-

stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into

piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer

inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain

constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect

plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Waste and vent piping system smoke testing: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed

by the Owners Representative.

F. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence

of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before

it was tested.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating

pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test

source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until



3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223100 - 1

SECTION 223100 – DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water softeners and accessories for water-supply systems.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing and HVAC Insulation" for softener-tank insulation.

2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing and HVAC Insulation" for softener-piping insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; ion-exchange

resins; salt purity and form; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment layouts and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Reports: For softener tanks, as required by ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: As specified in this Section.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

F. Maintenance Agreement: As specified in this Section.

G. Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA



A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water

softeners and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with

equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product

Substitutions."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Qualified manufacturers will have the entire softener certified as a system to NSF/ANSI 61,

NSF/ANSI 372, CSA 483.1, UL/CUL and CE.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements

of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace

components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period. Include coverage for the following:

1. Attrition loss of resin not to exceed 3 percent per year.

2. Resin not to be washed out of system during service run or backwashing period.

3. Effluent turbidity not to be greater and color not to be darker than incoming water.

4. Underdrain system, gravel, and resin not to become fouled, with turbidity or by dirt, rust,

or scale from softener equipment or soft water, while operating according to

manufacturer's written operating instructions.

C. Warranty Period: Not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance: Submit four copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued Service and

Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Owner's acceptance. Offer terms and

conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing continued testing and servicing to include

replacing materials and equipment. Include one-year term of agreement with option for

one-year renewal.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Salt for Brine Tanks: Furnish in the same form as and at least three times original load

a. Pellet Form: In 40- or 50-lb (18.1- or 22.7-kg) packages.

2. Store salt on raised platform where directed by Owner. Do not store in contact with

concrete floor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Commercial/Industrial Water Softeners:

a. Bruner Corp.

b. Columbia Water Conditioning Systems, Inc.

c. Culligan International Co.

d. EcoWater Systems, Inc.

e. Marlo of Racine, Inc.

f. United States Filter Corp.

g. Water & Power Technologies, Inc.

h. Water King, Inc.

i. Water Soft, Inc.

2.2 COMMERCIAL WATER SOFTENERS

A. Provide as indicated a vertical pressure type water softener system complete with pressure

vessel, softening resin, control valve, brine maker and electronic controller. The system will be

of an approved design as fabricated by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of

water treatment equipment. All equipment and material will be supplied in compliance with the

specifications as intended for a complete and operational system.

B. The system specifications are based on Culligan International Model CTM-60-PF 14-inch

Duplex Tank with Progressive Flow and 2-inch Plumbing Adapter configured as a Duplex

system with Aqua Sensor device.

1. The purpose of the Culligan International Culligan Top Mount Duplex automatic water

softener will be to remove mineral hardness from a known water supply to a level not to

exceed 17.1 mg/l, as determined by an accepted ASTM or EDTA test method, when the

system is operated at 10 GPM and in accordance with the operating instructions. The

system will be capable of supplying 4,561 gallons of softened water between



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


regenerations based on the influent water analysis listed later in this equipment

specification.

2. The systems performance is rated at a design flow rate of 10 GPM with a rated pressure

drop of 0.1 PSI, and will be capable of a peak flow rate of 138 GPM for sustained periods

of 90 minutes with a pressure drop of 25 PSI.

C. Performance and Design Data:

1. Influent Water Analysis:

a. Calcium, Ca: 70.8

b. Magnesium, Mg: 16.9

c. Total Hardness, gpg: 13

d. Eff. Hardness, gpg @ 100% Cap.: 13

(Constituents above are expressed in mg/l as CaCO3 or as otherwise specified.)

e. Iron, Fe: <0.05

f. Manganese, Mn: <0.02

g. Total Dissolved Solids, TDS: 416.9

(Constituents above are expressed in mg/l.)

h. Turbidity, NTU: 0.1

i. Color: 2.0

j. pH: 8.0

D. Design Parameters:

1. Normal System Flow and Pressure Drop: 51 GPM at 15.0 PSI

2. Maximum System Flow and Pressure Drop: 69 GPM at 25.0 PSI

3. Backwash/Rinse Flow: 3.5 GPM

4. Backwash Volume: 116 gallons nominal

5. Daily Water Usage: 4,000 gallons

6. Daily Hours of Water Demand: 8

7. Operating Temperature Range: 40-120°F

8. Operating Pressure Range (System): 35-125 PSI

9. Electrical Requirements: 120 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Ph

(dedicated receptacle req'd,)

10. System Dimension (L x W x H): 69 inches x 20 inches x 66 inches.

E. Effluent water quality: < 1 grains per gallon hardness (ASTM soap test method)

F. Softener Tank(s): Each system shall include two (2) tank(s). Each softener tank shall be 14-

inches in diameter. The overall tank height (less base) shall be 27-inches, sufficient to allow for

a proper freeboard space above the resin bed for adequate expansion of the resin during

backwashing.

1. Tank(s) shall be manufactured of polyester reinforced by a continuous roving glass

filament overwrap. The top opening will be 4"-8 UN threaded and the tank bottom will

be supported on a molded structural base.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


G. Internal Distribution:

1. The upper distribution system shall be of the single point diffuser type to dispense water

laterally to avoid channeling within the resin bed.

2. The lower distribution system shall be of the single point distributor type, constructed of

PVC pipe and a fine slotted strainer to provide even flow distribution through the resin

bed. The distribution system shall be embedded in a two-layer subfill of washed

inorganic material to support the resin bed.

H. Main Operating Valve:

1. The main operating valve shall be of a top mount design constructed of thermoplastic

resistant to attack by substances found in natural water supplies. Inlet and outlet

connections to be 1.5” or 2-inch NPTE. The Cv (flow coefficient) of the main operating

valve shall be equal to or greater than 32.

2. A vacuum breaker and pressure regulating valve shall be integrated in the design of the

main operating valve.

3. The main operating valve will be of the motor driven, mechanically activated design with

5 positions to accomplish the regeneration steps of backwash, brine draw/rinse, fast rinse

and brine refill in addition to the service position. The internal seals will be of a modular

design for ease of replacement and service.

4. The main operating valve will be fitted with a fixed orifice eductor to control brine

draw/slow rinse.

5. The main operating valve shall be designed by the same manufacturer as the water

softener system and tested prior to shipment.

I. Flow Control

1. The backwash flow controller shall be a pressure-compensating orifice capable of

providing and maintaining proper backwash flows over the entire listed operating

pressure range of the system. The backwash flow controller shall be easily serviced

without special tools and design so that service to the flow controller can be performed

without disassembly of the valve body or the sequencing controller and without

disconnecting existing inlet and outlet piping connections.

J. Controls:

1. A fully integrated programmable microprocessor driven electronic controller shall be

provided to automatically cycle the main operating valve through the regeneration

sequence. The electronic controller shall be designed and manufactured by the same

manufacturer as the water treatment equipment.

2. The controller shall be capable of initiating a regeneration by accepting an internal signal

from the controller time keeping device; an external Hall-Effect flow sensor, an aqua

sensor, an external device such as a remote start push-button or any combination of these

methods. The controller shall sequence all steps of an automatic regeneration and

automatically return the softener to a service or stand-by mode. The initiating time

and/or volume setpoints shall automatically reset upon completion of the regeneration

sequence.

3. The controller shall include a sealed keypad, capable of programming all controller

functions, located on the face of the controller. The controller display shall be a multi-line



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


OLED display capable of full text readouts of operating status and codes. The firmware

shall be capable of being updated to the latest version.

4. An audible alarm beeper capable of emitting a tone of ~70 dBA shall be provided but

capable of being disabled if so desired.

5. The controller shall allow for a manual initiation of the automatic regeneration sequence

by utilizing a regeneration selection from the controller menu.

6. The controller shall operate on a low voltage electrical system. The system shall include

a UL/CUL listed transformer. The entire electronic control package and its associated

inputs/outputs shall require not more than 24 VAC @ 50VA. The control shall be rated

for wet environments and certified to NEMA 3R.

7. The controller shall utilize EEPROM to save pertinent programmed data and statistical

functions. The controller must retain all functionality for power interruptions of less than

72 hours. A battery backup shall be provided and it shall be capable of maintaining the

time of day for a minimum of 5 years.

8. System Control Options:

a. Timeclock - An operator selected program of a time-initiated reconditioning for

single units shall be provided. The controller shall be capable of being entirely

programmed in the field without additional interface devices. The operator shall be

able to select reconditioning to occur after a specified number of hours or days or

specific day of the week. The electronic controller shall indicate various data that

includes number of reconditionings in the last 14 days, days since last

reconditioning, total number of reconditionings for the life of the unit, current day

of the week, time of day, and unit in reconditioning.

b. Water Meter - An operator selected volume based reconditioning for single units

shall be provided. A flow sensor package shall be provided consisting with an

appropriately sized installation fitting. The operator shall be able to select

reconditioning to occur after a specified number of gallons. The electronic

controller shall indicate various data that includes number of reconditionings in the

last 14 days, days since last reconditioning, total number of reconditionings for the

life of the unit, time of day, and unit in reconditioning.

c. Culligan Aqua Sensor: An operator selected program of immediate or delayed

hardness initiated regeneration for single units shall be provided. An Aqua-

Sensor® control probe will be inserted into the resin bed and will sense the need

for regeneration based on electrical impedance within the resin bed and will signal

the circuit board to initiate regeneration after a continuous 6-minute increase in

impedance ratio. The system will compensate for variations in water hardness and

temperature and will require no field adjustments when operated within the normal

temperature range of the softener. The controller shall be capable of being

programmed in the field without additional interface devices. The controller shall

indicate various data that includes number of regenerations in the last 14 days,

days since the last regeneration, total number of regenerations for the life of the

unit, last slow rinse time, time of day, and unit in regeneration.

d. In addition, the following functions shall be provided as part of the system

controller:

1) The controller shall have the capability of providing communications with

the following external devices:

a) Serial Communications (RS-232 & RS-485).



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


b) USB.

c) Modbus RTU.

d) Profibus Communications.

e) BACnet Communications.

f) Modem (cell modem or land-line modem).

g) Dry Contact Alarm Relay.

h) Wireless Remote (local RF wireless remote, 200-foot range).

2) Regeneration Sequence Timers: The controller shall allow control

customization of individual regeneration cycle times, each programmable

from 1 - 99 minutes. The regeneration cycle and time of cycle remaining

shall be displayed when in regeneration.

3) Lockout function: The controller shall include a lockout to prevent

unauthorized personnel from altering program data.

4) Regeneration override: The controller shall include a function to direct

pre-programmed regeneration after a user determined period of time (hours

or 24-hour intervals) without an input signal from another regeneration

initiation device.

5) Alarm Status Indicator: The controller shall monitor operation of internal

functions. If a fault is identified, the need for operator intervention will be

signaled visually within the controller display.

6) Two Auxiliary Outputs: Two auxiliary outputs shall be integral to the

controller circuit board. Each Output shall be capable of being programmed

to provide power to a "Normally Open" or "Normally Closed" contact (user

choice). These 24VAC outputs shall be used only for the purpose of

energizing a relay coil.

7) Flow Rate Indication: The controller shall be capable of indicating the flow

rate of the treated water.

8) Totalizer: The controller shall include a totalizer function and a display

capacity to 99,999,999 units before resetting to zero. The totalizer value

shall be displayed through the controller display during operation.

e. Flow Sensor(s):

1) Each softener will include a turbine-type Hall Effect flow sensor.

2) The sensor shall be integral to the control valve. A cable shall be provided

for direct connection to the system controller.

3) The flow sensor package provided shall be functional within the flow range

of 1.5 to 180.0 gpm.

4) The flow sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 2% over the full range.

f. Aqua-Sensor® Probe:

1) A patented Aqua-Sensor® control probe will be inserted into the resin bed

and will sense the need for regeneration based on an electrical imbalance

within the resin bed and will signal the circuit board to initiate regeneration

after a continuous 6-minute imbalance. The system will compensate for

variations in water hardness and temperature and will require no field

adjustments when operated within the normal temperature range of the

softener. The controller shall be capable of being programmed in the field



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


without additional interface devices. The Aqua-Sensor® will also be

capable of determining when the brine solution is rinsed from the resin bed

during the Brine Draw /Slow Rinse cycle, triggering the control to move to

Fast Rinse cycle.

K. Exchange Resin:

1. The ion exchange resin shall be virgin high capacity "standard mesh" of sulfonated

polystyrene type stable over the entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture

from attrition or osmotic shock. Each cubic foot of resin will be capable of removing

30000.0 grains of hardness as calcium carbonate when regenerated with 15.0 lbs of salt.

The resin shall be solid, of the proper particle size of 16x40 mesh, U.S. standard screen

and will contain no agglomerates, shells, plates or other shapes that might interfere with

the normal function of the water softener. The resin shall be manufactured to comply

with the food additive regulation 21 CFR 173.25 as set forth by the USFDA.

2. The system shall include 2.0 cubic feet of exchange resin per vessel and a total of 4.0

cubic feet of resin for the system.

L. Brine System:

1. Provide a complete brine system consisting of a plastic tank, cover, salt platform, brine

well, an automatic brine valve and all necessary fittings for operation with the water

softening system. The system shall consist of a combined brine measuring and salt

storage tank with salt platform. The tank will be sized 18.0 in. x 38.0 in.; the system will

include a total of one (1) brine tank(s). The brine tank can hold 600 lbs of salt which

provides for 33 regenerations per salt fill.

2. The brine tank will be equipped with a float operated non-corrosive field serviceable

brine float valve for automatic control of brine withdrawal and fresh water refill.

3. The brine valve will automatically open to admit brine to the resin tank during eduction

and close automatically providing positive shut-off to prevent air from entering the

system. The brine valve will also regulate the flow of soft water into the brine tank during

refill. The brine valve works with the timed fill feature of the main operating valve

controls to admit the correct volume of fresh water to the brine tank in accordance with

the refill time setting in the control program. The brine valve will include a float operated

safety shut-off valve as a back up to the timed refill from the main operating valve

control to prevent brine tank overflow.

M. Accessories:

1. CTM-60-PF Softener with No Hard Water Bypass.

2. Brine System with 24-inch x 40 inch tank, 1/2-inch valve and 650 pound salt capacity.

3. Aqua-Sensor Kit (Outdoor Rated).

4. Culligan GBE Standard Communication Cable.

5. CTM Plumbing Adapter, 2" NPT, Inlet/Outlet.

N. Instructions: One (1) complete set of installation, operating and maintenance manuals shall be

provided.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


O. Field Service: The services of a factory authorized service representative shall be provided to

supervise, inspect and provide operator training as required for initial start-up and system

operation. Contact your local Culligan dealer for service rates and scheduling.

P. Warranty: A single written warranty must be provided from the manufacturer of the water

softener system covering workmanship and materials.

2.3 WATER TESTING SETS

A. Water-Hardness Testing Set: Manufacturer's standard testing apparatus and chemicals with

testing procedure instructions and metal container suitable for wall mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for equipment. Refer to Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 23 Section "Division 23 Section "Common Work

Results for HVAC”.

3.2 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION

A. Install water softener equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices

needing servicing are accessible.

B. Anchor tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

C. Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each water softener

tank. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages For Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

D. Install water testing sets near each water softener and mount on wall where indicated.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections to dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings.

D. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


E. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory

mounted.

F. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. Electrical power wiring, devices,

and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

G. Provide vacuum breaker for protecting fiberglass tank from vacuum.

H. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field assembly of components and installation of water softeners, including piping and electrical

connections. Report results in writing.

1. Leak Tests: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total

of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance

characteristics. Comply with the following:

1. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water."

2. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water."

3. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water."

4. ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water."

5. ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Perform the following final checks before startup:

1. Water Piping Systems: Verify that tests have been completed.

2. Load Softener Tank: Install gravel to cover lower distribution system and add water;

smooth gravel surface and add softening resin.

3. Load Brine Tank: Add water and fill tank with pellet-form salt.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Energize circuits.

D. Adjust operating controls.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain units.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and

stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING 226650 - 1

SECTION 226650 – CHEMICAL-WASTE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and specialties for the following systems:

1. Chemical-waste and vent, gravity-flow, nonpressure piping system designated "acid or

chemical waste."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

B. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

C. PVDF: Polyvinylidene fluoride plastic.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot (3-m) head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For chemical-waste piping materials, components, and specialties.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system through

one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: Piping from different manufacturers may be used in same system if indicated

and suitable transition fittings matching both piping materials are used.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory.

C. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping."

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Enfield Industrial Corp.

2. Georg Fischer

3. Orion Fittings, Inc.

4. Schier Products Co.

5. Town & County Plastics, Inc.

6. Zurn Industries, Inc.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 1412, pipe extruded and drainage-pattern fittings

molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with fire-retardant additive complying

with ASTM D 4101 and certified to meet ASTM E-84 and UL 723. Include fusion- and

mechanical-joint ends.

1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive may be

used for underground installation.

B. PVDF Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F1673 pipe extruded and fittings molded, with

Schedule 40 dimensions, from PVDF resin complying with ASTM D 3222 and certified to meet

ASTM E-84 and UL 723. Include drainage-pattern fittings complying with ASTM D 3311,

except with fusion- and mechanical-joint ends.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used

joining materials.

B. Couplings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged

parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining

system piping.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings, adapters,

gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for

joining different piping materials.

D. Flanges: Assemblies of companion flanges gasket complying with ASME B16.21 and

compatible with system liquid, and bolts and nuts.

2.5 SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Connections Side connections for inlet, outlet, and vent pipes. Corrosion-Resistant Traps:

P-trap; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), as required to match connected piping.

1. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections.

2. PVDF: ASTM D 3222, PVDF resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may

be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Above Floor Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size

range:

1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion or

mechanical joints.

2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PVDF drainage piping and electrofusion or

mechanical joints.

C. Under Slabs-on-Grade, Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for

each size range:

1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PP drainage piping and electrofusion joints.

2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): PVDF drainage piping and electrofusion joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping

installation.

B. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and maintenance.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may

be used, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint

construction. If specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Plastic-Piping Electrofusion Joints: Make polyolefin drainage-piping joints according to

ASTM F 1290.

C. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system

materials.


A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,

pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch

(10 mm).

F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 33 inches (840 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.

G. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 72 inches (1830 mm).

H. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVDF piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2 (DN 20 to DN 40): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50): 36 inches (910 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

3. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1070 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.

I. Install supports for vertical PVDF piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) every 48 inches (1220 mm) and

NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger every 72 inches (1830 mm).

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific

connection requirements:

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect chemical-waste piping to sinks, specialties, accessories, and equipment. Use chemical-

resistant coupling, adapter, or fitting as required for materials being joined.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."


A. Chemical-Waste Piping Inspection:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is inspected

and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before

concealing after system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Chemical-Waste Piping Testing: Test systems according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, according to the following:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have

been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate

report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until it has

been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was

tested.

3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Test piping at completion of piping roughing-in.

Tightly close all openings in piping system, and fill with water to point of overflow, but

not less than 10-foot (3-m) head of water. From 15 minutes before test starts through

completion of test, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Finished Plumbing

Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures and equipment have been set and their traps

filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings

on roof and building drain where it leaves building, and introduce air into system equal to

pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of fixture to

measure pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air

throughout period of inspection. Inspect fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until



3.9 CLEANING

A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use

procedures described below:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Temperature Control Contractor: This term shall be synonymous with “installing Temperature

Controls Contractor.”

B. BAS: Building Automation System. This term is used synonymously with Facilities

Management Control System (FMCS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS).

C. DDC: Direct Digital Controls.

D. EMCS: Energy Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building

Automation System (BAS) and Facilities Management Control System (FMCS).

E. FMCS: Facilities Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building

Automation System (BAS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS).

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.

H. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The temperature control system shall be a Building Automation System that is connected to the

Owner’s network.

B. The Temperature Control Contractor will furnish to Owner a Building Automation System which

will include the main DDC panel(s), unitary DDC controllers, and required sensors and relays to

accomplish the sequence of operation.

1. The Temperature Control Contractor will install the automation system in strict accordance

with the installation manuals and provide dampers, damper and valve and actuators, and

system wiring.

C. Communication wiring shall be tested to demonstrate functional operation.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


D. All controls wiring shall be in conduit, refer to 260533 “Raceway And Boxes for Electrical

System” for requirements.

E. Wiring diagrams, temperature control drawings and point list shall be furnished by the BAS

Supplier to the successful Temperature Control Contractor for their use in installing the system.

F. The Temperature Control Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers indicated on the

drawings. Installation of these components will be by the Mechanical Contractor.

1. All reducers and fittings necessary to install smaller than pipe size valves shall be furnished

and installed under applicable piping sections.

2. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are

the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor

3. Review the damper schedule with BAS supplier prior to ordering parts.

G. The system shall be a DDC controls system.

1. Furnish and install a complete building automation system including all necessary

hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control

sequences of operation as called for in the specifications.

2. Building shall have all direct digital controls with electric actuators for dampers.

3. Unit controllers may communicate with main control panel via wireless communication

technology.

4. At a minimum, provide controls for the following:

a. Roof top units.

b. Variable volume terminal units.

c. Exhaust and supply fans.

d. Cabinet unit heater controls.

e. Radiant finned tube heaters.

f. Power wiring to DDC devices, smoke control dampers and BAS panels except as

otherwise specified.

H. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all necessary Ethernet Network

Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers,

relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along

with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and

provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for

equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate

requirements with the various Contractors.

I. All software required will be turned over to the Owner ready for use including all operation

parameters, set points, and schedules.

J. The Drawings and Specifications are not intended to show all details. Secure satisfactory

information before submitting the proposal and include in the proposal a sum sufficient to cover

all items of labor and material required for the complete installation of the devices and system

described.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


K. All Work performed under this Section of the Specifications will comply with all codes, laws and

governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes,

submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this

specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, this specification will

govern.

L. Furnish and install all actuators including necessary linkages, wire, and power wiring.

M. Provide all necessary power and control wiring not shown to be provided on the Electrical plans.

N. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives

of the Owner will review and check out the system – see System Acceptance and Testing section

of this document. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system

and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

O. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of the system in coordination with

the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’s representative.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. In accordance to the scope of work, the system shall also provide a graphical, web-based, operator

interface that allows for instant access to any system through a standard browser. The contractor

must provide microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing

capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control

functions. For this project, the system shall consist of the following components:

1. Ethernet-based Network Router and/or Network Server Controller(s): The BAS Contractor

shall furnish Ethernet-based Network Server Controllers as described in Part 2 of the

specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over

Ethernet at a minimum of 100mbps, and provide communication to the Standalone Digital

Control Units and/or other Input/Output Modules. Network Server Controllers shall

conform to BACnet device profile B-BC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial

communications or ARCNET to communicate with the workstations will not be accepted.

2. Network Controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL)

as Network Server Controllers (B-BC).

3. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs): Provide the necessary quantity and types of

SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including

air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate

completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to control its associated

equipment. Each BACnet protocol SDCU shall conform to the BACnet device profile B-

AAC. BACnet SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory

(BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).

B. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 100 or 1000 Mpbs Ethernet network supporting

BACnet, Modbus, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration

of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network

Server Controllers (NSCs), user workstations and a local host computer system.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision

Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

operating at 100 or 1000 Mbps.

D. The system shall enable an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™

protocol and/or ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2007, BACnet functionality to assure

interoperability between all system components. Native support for the LonTalk™ protocol and

the ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2007, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the

project is fully supported by the HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance,

upgrade, and expansion costs.

E. The system shall enable an architecture that utilizes a MS/TP selectable 9.6-76.8 KBaud protocol,

as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI / ASHRAE™

Standard 135-2008, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system

components. The AAC shall be capable of communicating as a MS/TP device or as a BACnet

IP device communicating at 10/100 Mbps on a TCP/IP trunk. The ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard

135-2008, BACnet protocol is required to assure that the project is fully supported by the leading

HVAC open protocol to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.

F. The software tools required for network management of the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI /

ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2008, BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings

are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans

and are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the

Owner. Minimum BACnet compliance is Level 4; with the ability to support data read and write

functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet IP or MS/TP.

Physical connection of LonWorks devices shall be via Ethernet IP or FTT-10A.

G. The system shall support Modbus TCP and RTU protocols natively, and not require the use of

gateways.

H. The field bus shall support the use of wireless communications.

I. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric

actuation of valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and

actuators as specified herein. The BMS is intended to seamlessly connect devices throughout the

building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable frequency drives, low voltage lighting

systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily coexist on the

same network channel.

1. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java and HTML5

enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration

programs.

2. Data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access.

3. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to

manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal

Intranet network.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


J. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory

certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the approved

manufacturer's local field office. The approved manufacturer's local field office shall have a

minimum of 3 years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide

documentation in the bid and submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's

relationship with the manufacturer when requested. Supervision, hardware and software

engineering, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the approved

manufacturer's local field office and shall not be subcontracted. The control contractor shall have

an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the site with factory certified technicians and

engineers, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment for the installed

system, and the control contractor shall have 24 hours/day, 7 days/week emergency service

available.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Visio Professional on AutoCAD software or

equivalent. In addition to the drawings, the Temperature Controls Contractor shall furnish

a flash drive containing the identical information.

2. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and work

stations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of

each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated

controller. "Typicals" will be allowed where appropriate.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, software description, electrical

characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of

product indicated.

1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

2. Each product marked with label used in Shop Drawings.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Coordinate with controlled equipment

wiring diagrams.

3. Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

4. Written description of sequence of operation with equipment identified with same label as

indicated in the Plans.

5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.

6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.

7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data

conductors.

8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point

addresses, and operator notations.

10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,

modems, and interconnections.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements. Test each and every software and hardware point in the system in order to assure

proper operation and functionality. System acceptance will not take place until the completion

of such testing. Include a "checked by", "date of testing", on test report.

E. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.

Include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.

F. Project Record Documents:

1. Record Control drawings shall be provided. The Control’s Contractor shall verify that

installation drawings are coordinated with the Record drawings, and update them if

required.

2. Control drawings for each system shall show all devices affecting the control circuit and

how each device interconnects to other devices in the circuit including, but not restricted

to, devices provided or connected by others such as fire alarm relays or motor starter

interlocks.

3. All devices in the control circuit shall be identified by their function in the circuit and

labeled with the brand name and part number of the device. Drawings shall also show

voltage characteristics for electrical and electronic devices.

4. Drawings shall have wiring details showing all electrical connections at devices and control

panel terminals including color codes and terminal connection numbers at devices and

control panels. All electric wiring shall be identified separately on drawings to distinguish

wire by voltage characteristic and function.

5. The intent of this specification is to obtain from the Temperature Control Installer one

drawing for each system which contains all of the information needed to identify all

components in the control circuit and to trouble shoot any problem which could arise in

the operation of the control system.

6. After submittal of record drawings and before acceptance of the job, a representative of the

Temperature Control Contractor shall conduct an on-site walk through of the control

system with the Owner’s Representatives. At the time of the walk-through, the

Temperature Control Contractor shall point out the location of all of the components of

each control system and describe the operation of each system to the Owner’s

Representatives.

7. The record drawings shall show actual locations of control components, including control

units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and

operating sequences.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


G. Acceptance Statement: Signed by Owner stating that training has been completed and operation

and maintenance information has been received.

1.6 OWNERSHIP

A. The Owner shall retain licenses to software for this project.

B. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer’s standard software and firmware licensing

agreement as a condition off this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and

application software to the Owner as defined by the manufacturer’s license agreement, but shall

protect the manufacturer’s rights to disclosure of Trade Secrets contained within such software.

C. The licensing agreement shall not preclude the use of the software by individuals under contract

to the Owner for commissioning, servicing or altering the system in the future. Use of the

software by individuals under contract to the Owner shall be restricted to use on the Owner’s

computers and only for the purpose of commissioning, servicing, or altering the installed system.

D. All project developed software, files and documentation shall become the property of the Owner.

These include but are not limited to:

1. Server and workstation software

2. Application programming tools

3. Configuration tools

4. Network diagnostic tools

5. Addressing tools

6. Application files

7. Configuration files

8. Graphic files

9. Report files

10. Graphic symbol libraries

11. All documentation


A. The equipment and software proposed by the supplier shall be currently in manufacture. No

custom products shall be allowed unless required by the specification. All products shall be

supported by the manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years, including spare parts, board repairs and

software revisions.

1. Provide a price schedule with guaranteed maximum pricing for each product and

component for a period of 3 years. Price shall include both material and labor.

B. System Startup and Commissioning

1. Control system to be set up and checked out by factory trained and competent technicians

skilled in the setting and adjustment of EMS equipment used in this project. This

technician shall be experienced in the type of systems associated with this EMS.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. At time of final observation, demonstrate the sequence of operation for each system to the

Project Manager.

3. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In

addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested

against the appropriate sequence of operation specified elsewhere. Successful completion

of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report

will be submitted to the Owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance

with the plans and specifications.

4. The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment

and systems in the presence of the equipment manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable,

and the Owner and Architect’s representatives.

5. The BAS Contractor shall provide a technician for three (3) days manpower and

engineering services required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in

testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BAS Contractor shall

coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing

Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract.

6. Startup Testing shall be performed for each task on the startup test checklist, which shall

be initialed by the technician and dated upon test was completion along with any recorded

data such as voltages, offsets or tuning parameters. Any deviations from the submitted

installation plan shall also be recorded.

7. Required elements of the startup testing include:

a. Measurement of voltage sources, primary and secondary

b. Verification of proper controller power wiring.

c. Verification of component inventory when compared to the submittals.

d. Verification of labeling on components and wiring.

e. Verification of connection integrity and quality (loose strands and tight

connections).

f. Verification of bus topology, grounding of shields and installation of termination

devices.

g. Verification of point checkout.

h. Each I/O device is landed per the submittals and functions per the sequence of

control.

i. Analog sensors are properly scaled and a value is reported

j. Binary sensors have the correct normal position and the state is correctly reported.

k. Analog outputs have the correct normal position and move full stroke when so

commanded.

l. Binary outputs have the correct normal state and respond appropriately to

energize/de-energize commands.

m. Documentation of analog sensor calibration (measured value, reported value and

calculated offset).

n. Documentation of Loop tuning (sample rate, gain and integral time constant).

8. A performance verification test shall also be completed for the operator interaction with

the system. Test elements shall be written to require the verification of all operator

interaction tasks including, but not limited to the following.

a. Graphics navigation.

b. Trend data collection and presentation.

c. Alarm handling, acknowledgement and routing.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


d. Time schedule editing.

e. Application parameter adjustment.

f. Manual control.

g. Report execution.

h. Automatic backups.

i. Web Client access.

9. A Startup Testing Report and a Performance Verification Testing Report shall be provided

upon test completion.

1.8 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS

A. All products of the EMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. With the

submittal documents, verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products, shall be

provided. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals, are not acceptable.

1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems.

2. UL-873; Temperature Indication and Regulating Equipment.

3. CSA; Canadian Standards Association.

4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices.

5. Comply with UL 94-5V for items in air plenums.

6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

and marked for intended use.

7. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."

8. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components.

9. Transient Protection: Comply with the standard for Transient Surge withstand capabilities

for electrical devices ANSI C62.41, IEEE-587-1980, Categories A and B.

B. All products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. System installation shall

comply with NFPA, NEMA, local and national codes.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to

be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details

before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation (if

applicable).

C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers" to achieve compatibility

with starter coils and annunciation devices.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


1.11 WARRANTY AND WARRANTY SERVICE

A. At completion of final test of installation and acceptance by the District, provide any service

incidental to proper performance for a period of one year. Provide one year in warranty service

with minimum of 2 maintenance/calibration inspections.

B. Equipment shall be warranted for one year (including defects in workmanship and material).

During warranty period supplier shall replace or repair, free of charge, any equipment proven to

be defective in workmanship or material.

C. Provide all software upgrade service and material for one year.

D. Certain electronic devices not manufactured by the EMS supplier, such as computers, printers

and CRT's display, shall carry the original manufacturer's warranty. Pass any registration and

warranty documents and warranty rights to the District.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Trane.

2. Allerton.

3. Schneider Electric.

4. Johnson Controls.

5. Siemens.

6. Daikin.

7. Honeywell.

B. Control Systems Components. Damper, valves and similar end device components can be from

the following manufacturers:

1. Barber Colman.

2. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

3. Delta.

4. Detroit Controls.

5. Dodge Engineering & Controls.

6. Dwyer.

7. Dynacon Inc.

8. Erie Controls.

9. Functional Devices Inc.

10. Hawkeye.

11. Heat-Timer Corp.

12. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.

13. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.

14. Kele & Associates.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


15. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.

16. Landis & Staefa, Inc.

17. Mamac Systems.

18. Penn.

19. Pre Con Corporation.

20. Ruskin.

21. TSI Inc. Environmental Measurements & Controls Div.

22. Uni-Line North America; Robertshaw Div.

2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General

1. To that end, this project shall be comprised of a high speed Ethernet network utilizing

BACnet/IP communications between System Controllers and Workstations.

Communications between System Controllers and sub-networks of Custom Application

Controllers and/or Application Specific Controllers shall utilize BACnet/MSTP (RS485)

or BACnet/Zigbee or a combination of the network protocols.

a. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom

Application and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/Zigbee (802.15.4)

as defined by the Zigbee Standard.

1) Each communication interface shall be Zigbee Building Automation Certified

product as defined by the BACnet Standard and the Zigbee Alliance.

2) Each System Controller shall function as a BACnet Router to each unit

controller providing a unique BACnet Device ID for all controllers within the

system.

2. The Controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters and

network switches routers necessary for the high speed Ethernet communications network.

3. All values within the system (i.e. schedules, datalogs, points, software variables, custom

program variables) shall be readable and controllable (where appropriate) by any System

Controller or BACnet Workstation on the communications network via BACnet.

B. SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

1. There shall be one or more independent, standalone microprocessor based System

Controllers to manage the global strategies described in Application and Control Software

section.

a. The System Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,

database, and programming requirements.

b. The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC

c. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual

point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

d. All System Controllers shall have a real time clock.

e. Data shall be shared between networked System Controllers.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


f. The System Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and

memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

1) Assume a predetermined failure mode.

2) Generate an alarm notification.

3) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the

time of the failure.

4) Automatically reset the System Controller to return to a normal operating

mode.

g. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient

conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure,

and shall be rated for operation at -40 F to 122 F.

h. Clock Synchronization.

1) All System Controllers shall be able to synchronize with a NTP server for

automatic time synchronization.

2) All System Controllers shall be able to accept a BACnet time synchronization

command for automatic time synchronization.

3) All System Controllers shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if

applicable.

i. Serviceability

1) Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor.

2) The System Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates

the current operating mode of the controller.

3) All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal

connectors.

4) The System controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for

installation and replacement.

j. Memory. The System Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming

information indefinitely without power to the System controller

k. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110%

of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80%

nominal voltage.

l. BACnet Test Labs (BTL) Listing. Each System Controller shall be listed as a

Building Controller (B-BC) by the BACnet Test Labs with a minimum BACnet

Protocol Revision of 14.

2.3 APPLICATION SPECIFIC DEVICES

A. Application specific devices shall have fixed function configurable applications.

B. If the application can be altered by the vendor’s application programmable tool, the device is an

advanced application controller and not an application specific device.

C. Application specific devices shall be BTL certified.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.4 AIR TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER

A. Direct Digital Controls:

1. General: DDC Controls, actuator and costs to mount, calibrate and test the system shall be

the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor.

2. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted by terminal

unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Shall be capable

of maintaining airflow to within +/- 5 percent of rated unit airflow setpoint with 1.5 duct

diameters straight duct upstream from the unit.

B. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminal Unit Control:

1. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controller per

VAV terminal unit. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer and transformer

shall be supplied by the BAS contractor. The cost to mount, calibrate and test the controller,

transducer, transformer and actuator shall be in the BAS price.

2. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies and provide

the points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specified monitoring and

diagnostics. Points to include occupied and unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.

a. Grouping: The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands.

These groups shall make it possible for the operator to send a common command to

all boxes in a group to operate in the same mode. BAS shall also compile on a group

basis, the following:

1) Minimum group temperature.

2) Maximum group temperature.

3) Average group temperature.

4) Current airflow through boxes in group (total).

5) Ventilation ratio.

b. Setpoint Control: The BAS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of each

VAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual

zone setpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and not be dependent

upon the BAS for control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue

to control to current setpoints.

c. Cooling Valve Control: The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open,

fully closed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM position based on operator

commands. The operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum and

minimum airflow limits of the air valve through the BAS.

d. Operating Mode: The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupied

mode based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating & cooling

setpoints shall be enterable for each mode through the BAS. Other modes available

for special applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and

minimum flow.

e. Control Offset: The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating

setpoints of one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This

capability will allow for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system

requirements, such as demand limiting.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


f. Automatic Recalibration: The system shall automatically recalibrate its air flow

sensing and air valve position measurement system at system startup and on a

scheduled basis.

g. Terminal Unit Status Reports: For each terminal unit, the BAS shall provide an

operating status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CFM, etc.),

setpoints, and modes.

h. Terminal Unit Group Report: For each group of VAV terminal units, the BAS shall

report the group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature,

minimum zone temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also

display for each terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints

and the current zone temperature.

3. Terminal Box Diagnostics:

a. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control at its

maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its low range, unit shall control

to its minimum CFM setpoint.

b. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. A diagnostic message shall be

displayed upon operator inquiry.

c. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressure

dependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall be displayed

upon operator inquiry.

d. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shall

automatically control to programmed occupied setpoints. Diagnostic message shall

be displayed upon operator inquiry.

2.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. System Software

1. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All

software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications

shall occur at the operator interface.

a. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in

the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop,

optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may

consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide

the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall

consist of the following:

1) Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.

2) Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any

day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall

override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be

defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it

will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the

week.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3) Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99

special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the

scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be

able to define the length of each holiday period.

4) Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an

optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a

zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space

temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate

separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied

for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start

algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in

minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined

time limit.

b. Trend Log Application

1) Trend log data shall be sampled and stored on the System Controller panel

and shall capable of being archived to a BACnet Workstation for longer term

storage.

a) Trend logs shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time.

b) Trend log intervals shall be configurable as frequently as 1 minute and

as infrequently as 1 year.

2) Automated Trend Logs.

a) The system controller shall automatically create trend logs for defined

key measurements for each controlled HVAC device and HVAC

application.

b) The automatic trend logs shall monitor these parameters for a minimum

of 7 days at 15 minute intervals. The automatic trend logs shall be user

adjustable.

B. Local Occupant Interface – Touch sensitive display

1. A wall mounted touch screen display shall be located in Office - 118 for local access to the

system.

2. A local occupant interface shall provide a single point from which to control setpoints from

multiple pieces of equipment.

3. The local interface shall provide scheduling with the ability to schedule events as least 1-

year in advance.

4. The local occupant interface shall optionally include PIN control and limited temperature

adjustments.

5. The local interface shall display alerts that require service of the connected equipment.

6. Local occupant interface touch sensitive display hardware requirements:

a. Input power: 9-12 VDC

b. Temperature: 0°C to 40°C

c. Humidity: 85% RH

d. Mounting Type: VESA (75 mm x 75 mm)



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


7. Local Occupant Interface Touch Screen Display must meet the following Agency

Compliance:

a. ROHS

b. FCC CFR Title 47, Part 15.

c. CE Compliant.

d. Multiple Mounting Options (Ability to be mounted on a VESA mount (75 mm x 75

mm), or remotely mounted).

C. Mobile App Interface:

1. The operator interface shall support system access on a mobile device via a mobile app to:

a. Monitor equipment

b. Make setpoint changes

c. Override occupancy

d. View dashboard graphics.

e. Control Space temperature.

f. Manage alarms.

2.6 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK AND SPACE SENSORS

A. Architecture/Communication

1. Wireless equipment controllers and auxiliary control devices shall conform to:

a. IEEE 802.15.4 radios to minimize risk of interference and maximize battery life,

reliability, and range.

b. Communication between equipment controllers shall conform to ZigBee Building

Automation (ZBA) standard as BACnet tunneling devices to ensure future

integration of other ZBA certified devices.

c. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft. (762

m) with less than 2% packet error rate to ensure reliable operation.

d. To maintain robust communication, mesh networking and two-way communications

shall be used to optimize the wireless network health.

e. Wireless communication shall be capable of many-to-one sensors per controller to

support averaging, monitoring, and multiple zone applications.

f. Certifications shall include FCC CFR47 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES -

Section 15.247 & Subpart E.

B. Operator Interface

1. Wireless Space Sensors

a. Battery life shall be 15 years or greater to minimize the need for battery replacement

in typical operating conditions.

b. To check for proper operation, wireless space temperature sensors shall include a

signal strength on the space sensor display.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


c. To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be

displayed on the digital display. Error codes shall include: not associated, address to

000, improper software configuration, input voltage too high, or general sensor

failure. Codes shall be indicated on inside of sensor back cover.

d. An optional 2% relative humidity sensors module shall be available for humidity

control applications to minimize the need for wires sensors, and shall not shorten

typical battery life to less than 15 years.

2. Service Tools

a. To support network setup and troubleshooting, service tools shall display link

quality and hop quantities for each wireless device.

b. Wireless service tool access to comm link shall be provided to minimize installation

and troubleshooting labor.

C. Auxiliary Control Devices

1. Wireless space sensors for use in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)

systems.

a. Temperature and Humidity Range

1) The ambient operating temperature range for the wireless space sensor shall

be 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).

2) The ambient storage temperature range for the wireless space sensor shall be

-40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).

3) The ambient operating and storage humidity range for the wireless space

sensor shall be 5 to 95%, non-condensing.

b. Components

1) Wireless space sensors shall be available as: temperature only, field

configurable model with optional 2% humidity module for use in either model

above. The field configurable model shall all allow field configuration

without a field service tool. Configuration options include: setpoint, override

pushbuttons, fan speed, and system mode switches. System mode, fan speed

and setpoint shall include a lock option.

2) The wireless space sensor addresses shall be held in non-volatile memory to

ensure operation through system voltage disturbances and to minimize the

risk of incorrect association.

3) The wireless space sensor shall be addressed using pushbuttons and display

with numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time and

minimize risk of incorrect addressing. Two position DIP switches are not

acceptable.

4) Installation and replacement of failed sensors shall be accomplished

automatically after power up.

5) The wireless space sensor shall include security screws to protect against

theft.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


6) Wireless space sensor component certifications shall include:

a) TFP-13651127 - Canada Compliance

b) UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment

c) UL 94 - The Standard for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts

in Devices and Appliances: 5 VA flammability rating

d) UL 873 - Temperature regulating and indicating equipment

c. Accuracy

1) To ensure proper system performance, the wireless space sensors shall

automatically determine when the space temperature is rapidly changing.

When the space temperature is readily changing, the space temperature shall

be transmitted at least once each 30 seconds. The maximum time between

transmissions shall be 15 minutes. Space temperature sensing accuracy shall

be +/- 0.5F (+/- 0.28C).

d. Power Requirements

1) The wireless space sensor battery life shall provide at least 15 years life under

normal operating conditions and must be readily available size AA, 1.5V.

2. CO2 Sensors – can be combined temperature and CO2 sensors

a. CO2 Range: 0 to 10,000 ppm CO2

b. Accuracy at 25°C: +/- 40 ppm CO2 + 3% if reading (includes repeatability)

c. Pressure Dependence of Output: built-in pressure sensor eliminated inaccuracy due

to altitude.

d. Recommended calibration Interval: None units are auto-calibrated.

e. Response Resolution: 50 ppm change or 15 minute heartbeat.

f. Life expectancy: 15 years.

g. Operating Temperature: From 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)

h. Storage Temperature: From -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

i. Humidity Range: 20% to 60% RH

j. Warm-Up Time: 1 minute @ full spec 15 minutes

k. Housing Material: Polycarbonate/ABS Blend (wall)

3. Wireless Communications Interface for use in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

(HVAC) systems

a. Temperature and Humidity Range

1) The ambient storage temperature range for the wireless communications

interface shall be -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).C.

2) The ambient operating and storage humidity range for the wireless

communications interface shall be 5 to 95%, non-condensing.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


b. Components

1) The wireless communications interface shall be addressed using rotary

switches with numerical indication to simplify and reduce installation time

and minimize risk of incorrect addressing. Two position DIP switches are not

acceptable.

2) Wireless Comm Interface certifications shall include:

a) TFP-13651127 - Canada Compliance

b) UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment

c) UL 94 - The Standard for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts

in Devices and Appliances: 5 VA flammability rating

d) UL 873 - Temperature regulating and indicating equipment

e) ZigBee Building Automation, BACnet Tunneling Device.

D. WCI Wireless Communication

1. Signal range typically has a radius of 200 FT (60 M) - potentially more for line-of-sight

installations, and less for obstructed installations.

2. Each network shall have 1 WCI network coordinator and up to 30 WCI network members.

3. The Tracer SC supports up to 8 network coordinators and up to 120 WCI network members.

4. Maximum IMC wiring length between a WCI and a controller is 656 ft (200 m).

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers and field interface panels shall be mounted in new enclosures unless otherwise

stated in this specification.

B. For all input/output devices which require field interface devices, these devices where practical

will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). All other field interface devices will be mounted

at the point of field interface in a separate enclosure suitable for the location. Provide an enclosure

which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts.

C. FIP's shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, safety circuits, and

I/P transducers.

D. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a

hinged door and lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. Each

side of the cabinet shall have knockouts for rigid, soft or flexible tubing. To join individual

cabinets, remove knockouts and fasten appropriate fittings and locknuts.

E. The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within controllers

shall be wrapped and secured.

F. All tubing shall be connected to enclosures through conduit. Use bulkhead fittings where

appropriate.

G. The panels shall be Detroit Controls Inc., DCP Series Panels or equal.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.8 FIELD DEVICES

A. Included with field devices are all sensors, transmitters, transducers, wells, relays, switches and

power supplies necessary for the operation of the Level 1 and Level 2 controllers.

B. All field devices shall include the associated wiring, conduit, mounting, and enclosures.

C. Also included are control valves, valve actuators, damper actuators, and conventional controls

necessary for a completely functioning system in accordance with the sequence of operation.

D. Provide all field devices per the performance requirements set forth in this section. All devices

selected by the Temperature Controls Contractor must be contained in the Submittal documents

and are subject to approval by the Engineer.

E. All controls wiring shall be in conduit, refer to 260533 “Raceway And Boxes for Electrical


F. All sensors and signal conditioning equipment will be of the type which are universally accepted

in the industry, can easily be second sourced and is compatible with all of the manufacturer's

equipment.

2.9 COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

A. General Communication Guide: Do not run communication link wiring in the same conduit or

wire bundle with ac-power wires (including conductors running from Triac-Type outputs). Keep

polarity consistent throughout the site. Make sure that the 24 VAC power supplies are consistent

in how they are grounded. Avoid sharing 24 VAC between controllers. Use only one type of

communication cable; do not mix cable. If an existing job used alternate cable, continue using the

same cable after approval from the project manager.

B. BACnet MS/TP communication cable must be shielded twisted pair, 18 AWG minimum,

stranded, tinned copper conductors. Shield must be continuous throughout, isolated from other

conductors or ground, and grounded at the system controller only. Maximum capacitance between

conductors is 24 Picofarads per foot. Maximum distance is 4000 FT (1372 M). Maximum of 60.

Expansion module link limit is 656 FT (200 m). A BACnet terminator is required at each end of

the communication link. Topology must be daisy chained.

C. Ethernet LAN communication cable maximum distance is 295 ft (90 m) plus 33 ft (10 m) for

patch cables.

2.10 INPUT DEVICES

A. The system shall maintain the specified analog end-to-end accuracy throughout the warranty

period from sensor to controller readout.

B. Transducers may be supplied as an integral unit with the field sensor, or mounted separately in a

field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All transducers will be calibrated.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Sensors (transducers) will be appropriately packaged for the location.

1. Architectural housing for space mounting.

2. Weatherproof/sunshield housing for outdoors.

3. Thermal well housing for water applications.

4. Protective housing for duct mounting.

D. The sensor/transducer shall be selected to withstand ambient conditions where:

1. Moisture or condensation is a factor.

2. Vibration exists from ductwork, equipment, etc.

3. Reasonably expected transient conditions exist for temperatures, pressures, humidities, etc.

outside the normal sensing range.

E. The sensor/transducer will be appropriately selected to most closely match the expected sensing

range.

F. System accuracy of sensed conditions shall be as follows:

1. + 0.5 F for space temperature in the 0 - 130 F range.

2. + 0.5 for duct temperatures in the 40 to 130 F range.

3. + 1.0 F for outside air temperatures in the -30 to 140 F range.

4. + 1.0 F for water temperatures in the 30 to 230 F range (thermowell).

5. + 0.1 inch for static pressure over 0-5 inch water gauge.

6. + 0.1 inch for filter status differential over a 0-2 inch range.

7. + 1% for pressure switches.

8. + 1% for air flow.

G. Sensors in the return or discharge duct shall be of the single point type. Sensors in the mixed air

will be of the average type.

H. Thermowells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250oF and 300 series

stainless steel for all other applications.

I. All digital inputs will be provided by dry contacts. The contacts will be wired normally open or

normally closed as required.

J. Temperature Sensors: Provide thermistor or thin film silicon sensors for all temperature

applications. Solid state sensors shall be linear, drift free, and require only a one time calibration.

Temperature sensors will be by the use of thermistors (Precon model ST-3 or equivalent) or

RTD's.

K. Motor status (pumps, fans, etc.) by current sensing switch. Adjustable current sensing switches

shall be used on all motors.

L. Fan status by adjustable current sensing switches.

M. Differential pressure transducers shall withstand a momentary pressure of 150% of their

maximum rating without damage. Acceptable suppliers include Modus, Robinson Halpern and

Rosemont.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.11 OUTPUT DEVICES

A. The use of multiplexers will not be accepted.

B. Field relays shall have a minimum life of 1 million cycles without failure.

C. All digital outputs will be electrically isolated from the digital controller by interface relays.

2.12 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Actuators: Damper actuators shall be of the direct coupled type, suitable for direct

mounting to the damper shaft or valve stem. Actuators shall provide modulating rotational control

or two-position as required by the sequence of operation.

B. Damper actuators shall be spring-return type on outside air intake and relief air locations.

C. Damper actuators shall be sized to provide ample power to overcome the friction of damper

linkage, seals, and air pressure acting on the damper louvers. The operators shall be fully

proportioning unless otherwise specified. The operators shall be capable of operating at varying

rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and variable load requirements.

D. Damper actuator mounting shall be outside of the air stream. The actuators shall have external

adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The linkage arrangement shall permit normally open or

normally closed positions as indicated.

E. When fail-safe positioning is required (outside air intakes and relief air outlets), the actuators shall

have spring return.

F. Damper actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper

throughout its operating range.

2.13 DAMPERS

A. Dampers furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor shall be low leak parallel or opposed

blade and shall be single or multiple blade as required. Motorized dampers shall be parallel blade

for two-position control and opposed blade for proportional control applications or as shown on

the plans. Dampers are to be installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor under supervision of the

Temperature Control Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller

than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor. Parallel blade

dampers shall be used for fresh air/return air mixing applications.

B. All dampers frames are to be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized hat channel and shall have

flanges for duct mounting.

C. Bearings shall be stainless steel pressed into the damper frame.

D. Axles shall be 1/2-inch diameter minimum, plated steel.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


E. Replaceable rubber seals shall be provided with the damper. Seals shall be mechanically attached

to each blade edge. Independent self-compensating stainless steel end seals shall be installed

between the blade ends and the damper frame to provide a tight closing, low leakage damper.

F. Leakage through the damper shall not exceed 2 CFM per square foot at 1-inch w.g. for all sizes

24 inches wide or above. Blades shall be airfoil shape, single piece 14 gauge minimum and 6-inch

wide nominal width. Leakage and flow characteristics charts must be submitted to the Engineer

prior to approval of dampers.

G. Where vertical blade applications are shown or required, thrust collars and special construction

and/or bracing for the dampers may be necessary. Consult the manufacturer for

recommendations. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and

to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.

H. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model CD60 or equal.

2.14 WIRING AND CONDUIT

A. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and

communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.

B. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and

install barriers per the National Electric Code.

C. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum

1/2-inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight

compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

Provide conduit seal-off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of

high temperature/moisture differential. Refer to 260533 “Raceway And Boxes for Electrical


D. Flexible metallic conduit (maximum 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators,

controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit

shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

E. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and transitions from

EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal

four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS

boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

F. Conduit support / Anchor Methods

1. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.

2. Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or present inserts.

3. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts, or welded studs.

4. Wood Surfaces: Wood screws.

5. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors or power driver studs.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.15 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

A. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings.

B. Space temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat, direct light

and diffuser air streams.

C. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install

these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized.

D. Field interface panel enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s)

to which it is being interfaced.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that control units are connected to a conditioned power supply.

B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring are installed before

proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb.

B. Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements

and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

D. Verify location of exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate

42 inches above the floor.

E. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

F. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section

"Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

I. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23.

J. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply

with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop.

Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc.

C. Conduit, in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and

wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry

walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within

the limitations of standard manufactured colors.

D. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces,

plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right

angles to the building structure.

E. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas. All control tubing or wiring

in concrete walls or floors shall run in rigid conduit.

F. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the EMCS system.

G. Control system power shall be obtained from dedicated circuits on the nearest available 120 V

panel and clearly labeled.

H. All power wiring for the EMCS equipment shall be done with a dedicated earth ground by means

of wire media only, originating at the power service source earth ground.

I. The 120 VAC power wiring to each Level 1 controller shall be a dedicate run, with a separate

breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will

terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device.

3.4 DEVICE MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. The VAV terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a flowcross or equal static pressure and total

pressure sensing device, suitable for termination to barb fittings on the VAV controllers flow

sensor. The VAV controller and damper actuator shall be provided and mounted by the

Temperature Controls Contractor.

B. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good

heat transfer to the sensor.

C. Dampers will be furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor (unless noted otherwise) and

installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor.

D. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install

dampers that are smaller than duct size.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


E. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assemble multiple section automatic dampers, furnished by the

Temperature Controls Contractor, with required interconnecting linkages and extend required

number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper actuators.

F. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide access doors or other approved means of access through

ducts for service to control equipment.

G. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate

stratification while providing air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix

and seal permanently in place only after stratification has been eliminated.

H. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary valved pressure taps, water, drain and

overflow connections and piping.

I. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary piping connections required for flow

devices, valve position indicators, etc.

J. Automatic control valves and separable wells will be furnished by the Temperature Controls

Contractor and installed by the Mechanical Contractor.

K. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give

smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

L. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit

transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.

M. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they

are installed.

N. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure

probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the

plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.

O. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a

metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.

3.5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. Provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as

described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party

software necessary for successful operation of the system.

B. Provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list.

3.6 CLEANUP

A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and

thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


contract. Clean the exposed surfaces of tubing, hangers, and other exposed metal of grease,

plaster, or other foreign materials.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all control wires within control cabinets with labeling tape or sleeves using either words,

letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.

2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control

sequences.

3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation

specified.

3.9 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of 3 hours of on-site instructions, to owner personnel, in the operation and

maintenance of the control system. Provide training after the system has been installed and

checked out. The Owner will select and assign personnel to be trained.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and

stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,

executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and

requesting logs.

3. Review data in maintenance manuals.

4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect-Engineer, with at least seven days'

advance notice.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Point Verification:

1. To verify end-to-end operation of the system, the Contractor shall provide a hard copy of

an "All Points Summary Listing" to the Owner of each part or system to be placed in

warranty by the Owner and Engineer.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Sequence Verification:

1. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative and the Engineer of systems which

perform all specified sequences. The Contractor shall verify all sequences of operation

and place the system into warranty acceptance test.

C. Verify DDC as follows:

1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operation

verified.

a. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation.

b. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device

and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.

c. Time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and

observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.

d. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system

and observing the proper corrective system response.

e. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point

and all interlocked points.

3.11 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within two years of date of Substantial Completion, provide a Spring

and Fall site visit, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist

Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual

conditions.

3.12 SYSTEM VERIFICATION

A. General: The system installation shall be complete and startup service performed. Certify all

controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper

equipment operation. Complete system startup services prior to substantial completion. The

system will not be accepted until the field test procedures have been demonstrated, and all errors

corrected.

3.13 WARRANTY ACCESS

A. The Owner shall grant to the Contractor, reasonable access to the EMCS system during the

warranty period.

B. The Contractor shall provide and implement a system for purposes of remote diagnostics and

notification of desired exceptions. System shall provide the following functions:

1. Access to the entire facility control system by the Contractor to provide service and

diagnostic support.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Access by the Owner from off-site for similar purposes and for remote operation,

monitoring, and adjustment of facility functions.




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and

devices and submittal requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building Automation System. This term is used synonymously with Facilities

Management Control System (FMCS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS).

B. DDC: Direct-Digital Controls.

C. EMCS: Energy Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building

Automation System (BAS) and Facilities Management Control System (FMCS).

D. FMCS: Facilities Management Control System. This term is used synonymously with Building

Automation System (BAS) and Energy Management Control System (EMCS).

E. CFM: Cubic feet per minute.

F. VFD: Variable frequency drive.

G. Contractor: Where not specifically described herein, this term is used synonymously with

Temperature Control Contractor (TCC).

1.4 SUBMITTALS



B. Submittals for Sequence of Operation shall be included with Division 23 Section “HVAC

Instrumentation and Controls.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

2.1 GENERAL

A. Operator Workstation: Display the following plus those as specified in this section:

1. Normal and holiday schedules.

2. Alarm and time of alarm occurrence.

3. Alarm history.

4. System graphics.

B. Occupied/Unoccupied Modes: For the purposes of this specification, these modes are defined

as the Owner-defined and -adjustable hours of normal building operation. These schedules shall

be adjustable from an Operator Workstation, user interface, or the web-based interface. Note

that the Occupied/Unoccupied Mode shall apply to the overall building as a whole. Individual

room occupancy sensors (for lighting control) are a different type of setting, and do not control

the status of HVAC equipment described herein. These sensors are specified in Division 26

Section “Lighting Control Devices”.

C. General EMCS System Sensors:

1. Outdoor Temperature: Provides outdoor temperature reading.

2.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Domestic Hot Water (110 deg F) Circulating Pump (P-1):

1. The operation of this circulation pump shall be controlled by an aquastat.

2. The circulating pump shall run continuously under normal operation.

3. The aquastat shall serve as high-temperature protection for the loop. When the loop

temperature exceeds 115 deg F (adj.) as sensed by the aquastat, the circulating pump shall

be turned off. When the loop temperature drops below the high-limit deadband, the

circulating pump shall energize and run continuously.

2.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Thermostats (integral and remote mounted) shall control the electric unit heater to maintain the

space thermostat setting, by default 65 deg F (adj.).

B. The EMCS shall monitor space temperature.

C. The EMCS shall disable unit heaters based on outdoor air temperature above 65°F (adj.).



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.4 EXHAUST FAN CONTROL

A. The following fans shall be started and stopped by the BAS system based on adjustable time of

day schedule or sensor as described:

1. Exhaust fans EF-1.

a. This fan is a direct drive fan with a motorized damper.

b. This fan shall be started and stopped based on adjustable occupied/unoccupied

schedule. The exhaust fan’s operation shall be enabled by a damper end-switch.

When the exhaust fan's motorized damper has been proven open, the exhaust fan

shall be started. When the fans are off, the dampers shall be closed.

c. Operator Station Display. Indicate the following on operator workstation display

terminal:

1) System Graphic.

2) Fan start/stop.

3) Fan on/off status via current switch.

4) Damper open/close.

5) Damper End switch open/close.

2.5 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP UNITS WITH DX COOLING/HEATING AND

MODULATING GAS HEAT

A. Building Automation System Interface:

The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied Bypass, Morning

Warm-up / Pre-Cool, Occupied / Unoccupied and Heat / Cool modes. If a BAS is not present, or

communication is lost with the BAS the controller shall operate using default modes and

setpoints.

B. Modes of Operation

1. Occupied Mode: During occupied periods, the supply fan shall run continuously and the

outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements. The unit

controller shall control the supply fan speed to maintain the current duct static pressure

setpoint (adj.). The DX cooling/heating shall stage and gas heat shall modulate to

maintain the current discharge air temperature setpoint. If economizing is enabled the

outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the current discharge air temperature

setpoint.

2. Unoccupied Mode: When the lowest space temperature is below the unoccupied heating

setpoint of 65.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain

closed and the DX heating shall stage and/or gas heat shall enabled. When the space

temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint plus the unoccupied differential

of 4.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the DX heating and/or gas heat shall be

disabled. When the highest space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of

80.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if

economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the DX cooling

shall be enabled. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


minus the unoccupied differential of the supply fan shall stop, the DX cooling shall be

disabled and the outside air damper shall close.

3. Optimal Start: The BAS shall monitor the scheduled occupied time, occupied space

setpoints and space temperature to calculate when the optimal start occurs.

4. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is

below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When

morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside

air damper shall remain closed. When the average space temperature reaches the

occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

5. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is above the

occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated

the unit shall enable the fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall

remain closed, unless economizing. When the average space temperature reaches

occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

6. Optimal Stop: The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints

and space temperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop

mode is active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space

temperature offset setpoint.

7. The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and space

temperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop mode is

active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space temperature

offset setpoint.

8. Economizer: The supply air sensor shall measure the dry bulb temperature of the air

leaving the evaporator coil while economizing. When economizing is enabled and the

unit is operating in the cooling mode, the economizer damper shall be modulated between

its minimum position and 100% to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The

economizer damper shall modulate toward minimum position in the event the discharge

air temperature falls below the discharge low limit temperature setpoint. Compressors

shall be delayed from operating until the economizer has opened to 100%.

a. Reference Enthalpy: Outside air enthalpy shall compare with the reference

enthalpy control setpoint. The economizer shall enable when outdoor air enthalpy

is less than enthalpy control setpoint - 0.5 BTU/LB. The economizer shall disable

when outdoor air enthalpy is greater than enthalpy control setpoint + 0.5 BTU/LB.

C. Demand Control Ventilation: With input from the BAS individual space CO2 sensors the unit

controller will look at the CO2 sensor value and compare it to the CO2 Setpoint. If the CO2

level in the space is higher than the setpoint, the unit controller will modulate the outdoor air

damper open (PID loop in the controller is configurable) until the CO2 levels in the space are

within the setpoint value. The unit controller will then modulate close the OA damper (or

minimum position based on the value in the PID loop) and wait for the space CO2 level to

change again.

D. Power Exhaust: Powered Exhaust: When the supply fan operation has been proven and the unit

is in occupied there will be a call for the exhaust. When there is a call for the exhaust the

isolation dampers will be powered and the powered exhaust will be enabled once the end switch

on the exhaust actuators are proven. The exhaust fan speed will modulate to maintain CFM

offset from input from outside air airflow measuring station (Demand Control Ventilation-

DCV). During Unoccupied the powered exhaust will be shut off.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


E. Outdoor Airflow Monitoring: The outdoor airflow monitoring station and modulating damper

option selected with the unit, the unit controller will look at the Outdoor Airflow sensor value

and compare it to the Outdoor Airflow Setpoint. If the outdoor airflow is lower than the

setpoint, the unit controller will modulate the outdoor air damper open (PID loop in the

controller is configurable) until the airflow levels reach the setpoint value or until the damper is

at the Maximum Damper Position. The controller will continue to monitor the airflow and

adjust damper position to match the outdoor airflow to the setpoint.

F. Energy Recovery Wheel Operation: The ERV is interlocked with indoor fan and exhaust fan

operation in occupied heating, or cooling modes. When operating in Economizer Mode or

Ventilation Mode the ERV is disabled and the ERV by-pass dampers will open, powered

exhaust remains on. During Unoccupied both the ERV and the powered exhaust will be shut

off. During ERV operation, if the Exhaust Temperature across the ERV drops below 25°F, the

outdoor air bypass damper will start to slowly modulate open. If after the bypass dampers

modulate to 100 percent open and the exhaust temp across the ERV drops below 15°F (2°F

Deadband) for 5 minutes, the unit controller will command the ERV off. Note: For units with

optional ERV defrost heater, the control sequence will engage heater at frost condition rather

than stop ERV.

G. Condenser Head Pressure Control: A temperature sensor on the header of the condenser coil

will measure the saturated liquid temperature. Variable frequency drives will adjust the speed of

two condenser fans as needed to maintain head pressure control.

H. Supply Fan: The supply fan shall be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during

the unoccupied mode. A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure

across the fan. If the switch does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation a

fan failure alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS, the unit shall stop, requiring a manual reset.

I. Supply Duct Static Pressure Control: The unit controller shall modulate the supply fan output as

required to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint. If the duct static pressure falls below the

supply air static setpoint + dead band, the unit controller shall increase the output to the supply

fan to maintain setpoint. If the duct static pressure rises above the supply air static setpoint +

dead band, the unit controller shall decrease the output to the supply fan to maintain setpoint.

If for any reason the supply air pressure exceeds the fixed supply air pressure limit of 2.5 (adj.)

inches of W.C. the supply fan shall shut down. The unit shall be allowed to restart three times.

If the over pressurization condition occurs on the fourth restart, the unit shall shut down and a

manual reset diagnostic is displayed at the remote panel and/or the BAS system.

J. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the

filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes for 2 minutes after a request for fan operation

a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

K. Safety Control Operation:

1. Smoke Detectors: Provide contacts for alarm interface to fire-alarm control panel.

2. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost

sequence.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


L. The following points shall be displayed on the graphic for this system:

1. Supply Air Temperature.

2. DX Coil Leaving Temperature.

a. Outdoor Air Temperature

b. Outdoor Relative Humidity.

c. Exhaust Air Temperature.

d. Supply Fan Speed.

e. Exhaust Fan Speed.

f. Outdoor Damper Position.

g. Return Air Damper Position.

h. Digital Scroll Compressor Percentage.

i. Supply Air Temperature set point from BAS.

j. System Start Command

k. Supply Fan Status

l. Air Filter Pressure Drop

m. Air Filter Pressure Drop high limit alarm

n. Exhaust Fan Status

o. Compressor 1 Status

p. Compressor 2 Status

q. Gas Heat Enable and modulation percentage.

r. Alarm Reset

s. System Alarm Status

t. Supply Air Static Pressure set point from BAS.

u. Supply Air Static Pressure from BAS.

v. Energy Recovery Wheel Status

w. CO2 level setpoint.

2.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied and Unoccupied

commands. The BAS may also send a Heat/Cool mode, priority shutdown commands, space

temperature and/or space temperature setpoint. If communication is lost with the BAS, the

VAV controller shall operate using its local setpoints. The EMCS shall monitor all control

points and alarms provided by the manufacturer and display a representative system graphic on

the operator’s workstation.

B. Modes of Operation:

1. The occupancy mode shall be communicated or hardwired to the controller via a binary

input.

2. Occupied Mode: When the unit is in the occupied mode the VAV shall maintain the

space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable

ventilation and airflow setpoints shall be enforced. The occupied mode shall be the

default mode of the VAV.

3. Unoccupied Mode: When the unit is in unoccupied mode the VAV controller shall

maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


regardless of the presence of a hardwired or communicated setpoint. When the space

temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the VAV shall modulate fully closed.

4. Heat/Cool Mode: The Heat/Cool mode shall be set by a communicated value or

automatically by the VAV. In standalone or auto mode the VAV shall compare the

primary air temperature with the configured auto changeover setpoint to determine if the

air is "hot" or "cold". Heating mode it implies the primary air temperature is hot. Cooling

mode it implies the primary air temperature is cold.

5. Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local

setpoint, the VAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The VAV shall use the

locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint

is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the VAV shall use

the communicated value.

6. Cooling Mode: When the unit is in cooling mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the

space temperature at the active cooling setpoint by modulating the airflow between the

active cooling minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum cooling airflow setpoint. Based

on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint shall be one of the

following:

Setpoint Default Value

Occupied Cooling Setpoint 72.0 deg. F

Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 80.0 deg. F

Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint 76.0 deg. F

Occupied Min Cooling Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

Occupied Max Cooling Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

The VAV shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to

determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based

on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.

7. Heating Mode: When the unit is in heating mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the

space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the

active heating minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based

on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the

following:


Occupied Heating Setpoint 71.0 deg. F

Unoccupied Heating Setpoint 65.0 deg. F

Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint 67.0 deg. F

Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating

setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be

controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


8. Reheat Control: Reheat will only be allowed when the primary air temperature is 5.0

deg. F below the configured reheat enable setpoint of 70.0 deg. F (adj.). The reheat shall

be enabled when the space temperature drops below the active heating setpoint and the

minimum airflow requirements are met. During reheat the VAV shall operate as follows:

a. Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR): If the space temperature is at the heating

setpoint, the electric heater shall modulate as required to maintain space

temperature at the active heating setpoint while the VAV operates at its minimum

heating airflow setpoint. If the discharge air temperature reaches the design heating

discharge air temperature setpoint (adj.), the VAV shall modulate airflow between

the minimum heating airflow setpoint and the maximum heating airflow setpoint

as required to maintain space temperature at the active heating setpoint, while the

electric heater modulates to maintain discharge air temperature at the design

heating discharge air temperature setpoint. If the airflow reaches the maximum

heating airflow setpoint, the VAV shall modulate the electric heater as required to

maintain space temperature at the active heating setpoint, while the VAV operates

at its maximum heating airflow setpoint.

9. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm

shall be annunciated at the BAS. Space sensor failure shall cause the VAV to drive the

damper to minimum air flow if the VAV is in the occupied mode, or drive it closed if the

VAV is in the unoccupied mode.

10. Space CO2 concentration (where shown). The zone shall monitor the space CO2 level

and adjust the RTUs outdoor air quantity to maintain the maximum CO2.

11. Operator Workstation. Display the following

a. System Graphic.

b. Space/Room/area served.

c. Space occupied/unoccupied.

d. Space temperature.

e. Space temperature set point, occupied.

f. Space temperature set point, occupied standby.

g. Space temperature set point, unoccupied.

h. Space CO2. (See Plans for locations).

i. CO2 set point (RTU System setting).

j. Air-damper position as percent open, 0 to 100 percent.

k. Electric heating element as percent total, 0 to 100 percent.

l. Air flow.

m. Minimum Air Flow set point.

n. Heating Air Flow set point.

o. Cooling maximum airflow set point.

p. Discharge air temperature.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.7 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT AND

ELECTRIC RADIANT FINNED TUBE HEATING (ATU-102 & FTR-101& FTR-102) &

(ATU-201 & FTR-201 & FTR-202)

A. The controls sequence shall follow the same operation as the outlined above in the

“VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT” with the

following modifications in the sequence and system graphics.

B. Modes of Operation:

1. Heating Mode: When the unit is in heating mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the

space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the

active heating minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based

on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the

following:


Occupied Heating Setpoint 71.0 deg. F

Unoccupied Heating Setpoint 65.0 deg. F

Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint 67.0 deg. F

Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint See VAV Schedule

The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating

setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be

controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. The

radiant finned tube heater shall be activated before the heating minimum air flow is

increased. The reheat and radiant heaters shall work in unison to maintain space setpoint.

2. All other modes of operation shall remain the same as outlined above. The finned tube

electric radiant (FTR-##) heaters shall be disabled.

3. Operator Workstation. Display the following along with graphic information noted under

“VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT”:

a. System Graphic.

b. Space/Room/area served.

c. Space occupied/unoccupied.

d. Space temperature.

e. Space temperature set point, occupied.

f. Space temperature set point, occupied standby.

g. Space temperature set point, unoccupied.

h. Electric heating element as percent total, 0 to 100 percent.

i. Electric radiation units space temperature

2.8 SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS (SSIU/SSOU-*)

A. This system shall be controlled by the specified control system in Division 23 Section "Split-

System Air-Conditioning Units."



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Elevator Machine Room-211: Sensor shall monitor space temperature. An alarm shall be

annunciated at the BAS if the space temperature falls above 80°F (adjustable) and below 60°F

(adjustable).




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Double-wall round & flat oval ducts and fittings.

4. Sheet metal materials.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.

7. Duct Liner.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,

duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Sealants and gaskets.

2. Duct Liner and adhesives.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

2. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment.

C. Leakage Test Report.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Minimum duct gages shall be per SMACNA with the following additional constraint:

a. No duct shall be constructed of sheet steel less than 26 gage [0.0217 inch]

thickness. No exceptions!

B. Transverse Joints and Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate

according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Rectangular Duct Construction 2-Inch Positive or Negative Pressure Class

a. Fabricate ductwork per the latest edition of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards Metal and Flexible” and as further outlined below:

1) For ductwork sizes 34-inches and under, button punch snap lock (SMACNA

Figure L-2) will be allowed for longitudinal seams.

2) For ductwork sizes 36-inches and larger, longitudinal seams shall be

Ductmate, Ward, T.D.C., T.D.F. with Pittsburgh lock (SMACNA Figure L-

1) longitudinal seams.

3) All duct joints will be sealed in accordance with this specification.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Rectangular Duct Construction 3-Inch Positive or Negative Pressure Class

a. Fabricate ductwork per the latest edition of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards Metal and Flexible” and as further outlined below:

1) For ductwork sizes 28-inches and under, button punch snap lock (SMACNA

Figure L-2) will be allowed for longitudinal seams.

2) For ductwork sizes 30-inches and larger, longitudinal seams shall be

Ductmate, Ward, T.D.C., T.D.F. with Pittsburgh lock (SMACNA Figure L-

1) longitudinal seams.

3) All duct joints will be sealed in accordance with this specification.

3. Transverse Joints: Ductmate 25 or 35.

a. Factory fabricated slide-on transverse joints may be used at Contractor's option

with proper submittal data. Proper submittal data shall include MSD Sheets,

Specification Sheets, Applicable Duct Construction Standards, and Supporting

Test Data.

1) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Ductmate Industries Inc.

b) Ward Duct Connectors Inc.

c) Ward Industries Inc.

b. Ductmate, Ward Duct Connectors Inc., and Ward Industries Incorporated duct

connection systems will be accepted. Duct constructed using these systems will

refer to the manufacturer's guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement

size and spacing, and joint reinforcements.

c. Contractor-fabricated or factory-fabricated transverse flange joints which are

formed directly onto the end of the duct wall may be used at contractor's option as

described in this paragraph. Formed-on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T-25A/T-25B/T-

24) will be accepted. Formed-on flanges will be constructed as a SMACNA T-24

flange, whose limits are defined on page 1-25, 1985 SMACNA Manual, First

Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed-on flanges will be accepted.

Formed-on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42 inches wide or less

and subjected to 2-inch w.g. or less.

d. All applied connectors at transverse joints shall be sealed using a butyl rubber

gasket that is supplied by the manufacturer and installed in the field by the

Contractor.

e. All seams shall be sealed with a UL-Classified 25 flame spread and 50 smoke

developed sealant or better in accordance with SMACNA duct sealing

requirements.

f. Ductwork support, access doors not part of ducts, bar or angle reinforcing damper

rods and items made of uncoated mild steel shall be painted with two coats of

primer or provide galvanized equivalent.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Button punch snap lock (SMACNA Figure L-2) or Pittsburgh lock as

outlined previously in the specifications; no other exceptions.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Lindab Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. SEMCO Incorporated.

d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

f. WESCO.

g. Norlock.

h. Wichita Sheet Metal.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class,

materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


1. Transverse Joints shall have slip connections except where flanged connections

(Ductmate or other flanged connections) are called for in this specification.

C. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


D. All round ducts shall generally be spiral seam with slip connections.

1. Exception: Snap lock ductwork is generally prohibited. However, Snap lock ductwork

may be used as the last duct section connection to a diffuser above a concealed ceiling.

Any Snap lock ductwork used must be 26 gauge or heavier.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.3 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND & FLAT OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Double Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and

an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions.

1. Minimum duct gages shall be per SMACNA with the following additional constraint:

a. No duct shall be constructed of sheet steel less than 26 gage [0.0217 inch]

thickness. No exceptions!

2. Thermal Conductivity (k Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature.

3. Outer Shell: Base outer shell metal thickness on actual outer shell dimensions. Fabricate

outer shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation, and in metal

thickness specified for single wall duct.

4. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) thick fibrous glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.

Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single wall duct or

uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner

liner diameter.

5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat oval inner liners with sheet metal having

3/32 inch (2.4 mm) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use

the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:

a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with

standard spiral seam construction.

b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with

single rib spiral seam construction.

c. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.022 inch (0.55 mm) with

single rib spiral seam construction.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.

B. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell

and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature.

2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate

outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the same

metal thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.

3. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.

Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or

uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal

single-wall size.

4. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal having

3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use

the following sheet metal thicknesses:

a. Ducts 3 to 34 Inches (75 to 865 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).

b. Ducts 35 to 58 Inches (890 to 1475 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).

c. Ducts 60 to 88 Inches (1525 to 2235 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


5. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches

(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

(900 mm).

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per

sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class,

positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and

Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

H. Wire Hanger Specification

1. At the contractor’s option, Gripple Hang-Fast Wire Duct Hanger Systems Numbers 2, 3,

and 4 may be used for duct support. Per SMACNA testing, the Gripple Hang-Fast Wire

Duct Hanger Systems Numbers 2, 3, and 4 are acceptable alternatives for use with

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, Second Edition,

1995.

2. The Contractor shall provide the necessary supports / sway bracing to prevent ductwork

from movement when using the Gripple Hang-Fast Wire Duct Hanger Systems.

3. For externally insulated rectangular ductwork systems use the Gripple Wire Duct Hanger

Systems, with cradle and corner saddles to provide uniform support and to prevent

puncturing the vapor barrier.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


4. The basis of this Wire Hanger specification is Gripple Inc. Alternate manufacturers who

comply with this specification will be considered. The use of "Gripple" language within

this specification is not intended to limit the manufacturers.

5. Wire (Gripple) hangers may be used to suspend ductwork only.

6. Wire (Gripple) hangers consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with either a ferruled

loop, permanently fixed threaded 1/4-inch (or 3/8-inch) stud, or permanently fixed nipple

end with toggle, at one end or hook or eyelet.

7. Only wire and or supports and parts supplied by the wire manufacturer shall be used with

the system. All end fixings must be supplied by the same manufacturer as the wire rope.

There shall be no mix and match parts and or wire of varying manufacturers. The system

is secured and tensioned with a Gripple hanger self-locking grip at the other end.

8. Quality Assurance / Standards

a. Wire (Gripple) hangers have been independently tested by UL, CSA and

SMACNA, approved by ULC and CSA and comply with the requirements of

DW/144 and BSRIA - Wire Rope Suspension Systems. Wire rope used shall be

manufactured to BS EN 12385: 2002.

9. Product Selection

a. The contractor shall select the correct specification of wire (Gripple) hanger to use

for supporting each particular service from Table 1 below:

b. Table 1 Wire (Gripple) Hanger Safe Working Loads

Wire Rope Size Working Load limit (lbs)

No.1 0-22 lbs

No.2 23-100 lbs

No.3 101-200 lbs

No.4 210 -495 lbs

No.5 496 – 715 lbs

c. Each rope size is designated with a maximum Safe Working Load limit (which

incorporates a 5:1 safety factor).

d. Where the installed wire rope is not vertical then the working load limit shall be

reduced in accordance with the recommendations given in the manufacturer’s

handbook.

e. No in-line joints shall be made in the wire rope.

2.7 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with

NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type I, Flexible: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (R-value 6.3 (hr•ft2•°F)/Btu at

75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

3. Solvent or Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and

with ASTM C 916.

a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-

steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm)

thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers

of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal

nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals

not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse

joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.

7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have

either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge

facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.

b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning

vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other

buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws,

rivets, or welds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least

1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.

Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke

dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article according to the schedule as follows.

B. Definitions:

1. Conditioned Space: A space that is cooled, heated or indirectly cooled or heated.

2. Indirectly Conditioned Space: An enclosed space within a building that is not a heated

space or a cooled space, which is heated or cooled indirectly by being connected to

adjacent space(s) (example ceiling plenum).

3. Unconditioned Space: An enclosed space within a building that is not a conditioned space

or a semiheated space. Crawlspaces, attics, and parking garages with natural or

mechanical ventilation are not considered enclosed spaces.

a. Per the energy code, a duct shaft is considered an unconditioned space.

b. For the purposes of this specification, the mechanical rooms will be considered an

unconditioned space.

4. Seal Class/Level A is defined as the sealing of all transverse joints, longitudinal seams,

and duct wall penetrations. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary

sealant.

5. Seal Class/Level B is defined as the sealing of all transverse joints, and longitudinal

seams. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant.

6. Seal Class/Level C is defined as the sealing of transverse joints only.

C. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower Located in an

Unconditioned Space: Seal Class A.

3. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) Located in

Unconditioned Space: Seal Class A.

4. Exhaust Ducts Located in an Unconditioned Space: Seal Class C.

5. Return-Air Ducts Located in an Unconditioned Space: Seal Class B.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


6. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower Located in a

Conditioned Space: Seal Class C.

7. Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) Located in a

Conditioned Space: Seal Class B.

8. Exhaust Ducts Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class B.

9. Return-Air Ducts Located in a Conditioned Space: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and

supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each

branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of

16 feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

G. Installation of Wire Hanger (Gripple Hangers)

1. The wire (Gripple) hangers shall be fixed / attached to the existing building structure.

2. Grip Loop end can be wrapped around purlins, beams, roof trusses and other accessible

building features.

3. Grip Stud end can be fixed / attached with suitable anchors into concrete ceilings and

structures, metal decking and pressed metal brackets (using nuts).

4. Grip Toggle end can be fixed / attached to profile roof cladding, light fittings and

luminaries.

5. Other wire rope (Gripple) systems can be fixed / attached to an approved structure, as

determined by the Engineer. The Wire (Gripple) hangers shall not be attached to any

other services, without the approval of the Engineer.

6. All end fixings must be supplied by the same manufacturer as the wire rope. There shall

be no mix and match parts and or wire of varying manufacturers.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


7. It is recommended that the ductwork be installed low and adjusted upwards to the

required level with the Gripple.

a. Should the object require lowering, the grip can be unlocked using a setting key

allowing the suspension to be lowered or lengthened. When unlocking the grip, the

weight of the suspended object must be independently supported.

8. The wire rope must not be damaged, twisted or deformed in any way prior to, or during,

installation. Any such wire rope that is damaged, twisted or deformed in any way must be

discarded and replaced.

9. When installing wire (Gripple) hangers the angle between the ropes when exiting the

Gripple must never exceed 60 degrees.

10. Lubricants, paint or any other coating should not be applied to the wire (Gripple) hanger

as it may impair its performance.

11. Wire (Gripple) hangers should always be installed in accordance with all the

manufacturer’s recommendations.

12. The use of Gripple cable hangers on Insulated duct is a permitted installation under the

guidelines of SMACNA. When Gripple hangers are used on insulated ducts, the

following installation technique shall be followed:

a. When installing Gripple cable hangers on the outside of the insulation, care must

be taken not to damage insulation. Where the cable comes into physical contact

with the insulation, the Installer shall use plastic sheathing over the cable. Gripple

recommends model HF-SLEEVE-2MM for No. 2 cable and HF-SLEEVE-3MM

for No. 3 cable.

b. For externally insulated rectangular ductwork systems use the Gripple Wire Duct

Hanger Systems, with cradle and corner saddles to provide uniform support and to

prevent puncturing the vapor barrier.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section

"Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat,

black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application

requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.


A. Perform tests and inspections.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report

for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (750 Pa): Test representative

duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Plan

a. The Contractor shall develop an indoor air quality (IAQ) plan based upon the 2000

SMACNA DUCT CLEANLINESS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.

b. This IAQ plan shall address procedures that the Contractor will implement on any

commercial duct installation project to reduce the potential for duct contamination

being introduced during ductwork installation.

c. If a satisfactory plan is developed, submitted and enforced, the duct cleaning

paragraphs of this specification can be omitted.

2. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

3. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC

Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated duct. Patch

insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air

Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with

99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

condensate drain pans, and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate

collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, or duct accessories.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. All ductwork noted as flat oval duct shall be round double wall internally insulated ductwork

with flat oval double wall internally insulated fittings G90 finish.

B. The following conceal ducts shall be fabricated with single wall rectangular or round galvanized

sheet steel.

1. Supply Ducts:

a. Ducts Downstream of Air Terminal Units:

1) Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

b. Ducts from Roof Top Units:

1) Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa).

2. Return Ducts:

a. Return ducts:

1) Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

3. Exhaust Ducts:

a. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

1) Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

C. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

D. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction

have proportionately fewer segments.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Welded.

d. Adjustable 5 piece elbows may be used only at connections to diffusers. All 5-

piece elbows used must be 26 gauge or heavier.

E. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in with air scoop or high efficiency

takeoff fitting (HETO).

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.

b. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

F. Liner:

1. Supply Air Ducts / Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type I 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

2. Return Air Ducts / Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type I 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

3. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

4. Duct Liner Application Schedule

a. Line the first 10 lineal feet of supply and return ductwork routing to/from roof top

units shall be provided with duct liner.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


G. Ductwork Material Schedule:

Ductwork Material Schedule:

Air System Material

Exposed and Concealed Flat-Oval Supply and

Return Air Duct Double wall insulated with a G90 finish

Concealed Rectangular and Round Supply Galvanized steel, manufactured single wall ductwork

Concealed Rectangular and Round Return Galvanized steel, manufactured single wall ductwork

Concealed Exhaust/Toilet Exhaust Galvanized steel

Exposed Exhaust/Toilet Exhaust

Double wall insulated with a solid inner liner and a G90

finish

All Rectangular and Round Ducts in Mechani-

cal Rooms

Galvanized rectangular ductwork with traverse duct

connector systems or galvanized round with flanged

duct connections




ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 1

SECTION 237416.11 - PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the following

components and accessories:

1. Casings.

2. Fans.

3. Motors.

4. Rotary heat exchangers.

5. Coils.

6. Refrigerant circuit components.

7. Air filtration.

8. Gas furnaces.

9. Dampers.

10. Electrical power connections.

11. Economizer Section

12. Sound Attenuation Package

13. Controls.

14. Accessories.

15. Roof curbs.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each RTU.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of RTUs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.

B. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound

performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311.

2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D.

3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.

2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. AAON.

2. Annexair

3. Carrier Corporation, a unit of United Technologies Corp.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


4. Daikin Applied.

5. Trane.

6. YORK, a Johnson Controls Company.

2.3 CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated

panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints

between sections sealed.

B. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with 2-inch (50-mm) antimicrobial

insulation and seal moisture tight for R-13 performance.

C. Exterior Casing Material:

1. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant

baked enamel finish. Unit’s surface shall be tested 672 hours in a spray test in compliance

with ASTM B45. Structural members shall be a minimum of 16-gauge with access doors

and removable panels of minimum 20-gauge.

2. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seam existing, it shall be

double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

D. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements: Inside Casing: G-90-coated galvanized steel.

E. Panels: Water- and air-tight hinged panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating

section, ERV and power exhaust fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and

unit control section. Door hardware shall be oriented to allow the door swing to be reversed.

1. Latches with hold down hook will be factory installed on hinged access doors.

F. Condensate Drain Pans: Fabricated using stainless-steel sheet 0.025 inch (0.715 mm) thick, a

minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and

construction of drain pans.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal

moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.

G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

H. Provide openings on the base for power, control and gas connections.

I. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.4 FANS

A. Supply-Air Fans: Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan

scrolls.

1. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motor shall be resiliently mounted in the fan inlet.

2. Fan shall be factory wire to on-board Variable Frequency Drive and shall be equipped

with slide out service access.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Shall be direct-drive vertical discharge design with low-noise corrosion

resistant glass reinforced polypropylene props, powder coated wire discharge guards and

electroplated motor mounting brackets. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balances.

Condenser fans to be controlled via VFD or ECM motor to maintain adjustable pressure.

C. Relief-Air Fan: Backward inclined, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

D. Airflow Station:

1. Outside Air Inlet shall have a factory installed airflow measurement with PID control

output.

2. Supply fan shall have a factory installed piezometer airflow measuring ring installed on

the outlet of the cone.

3. Exhaust fan shall have a factory installed piezometer airflow measuring ring installed on

the outlet of the cone.

E. Shaft grounding rings shall be factory provided on both the supply and exhaust/relief fan

motors.

2.5 MOTORS

A. Comply with Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and the

requirements of this Article.

B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not

require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

C. All fan motors shall be premium efficiency ODP and meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of

2005/10 (EPACT).

D. All fan motors shall either be permanently lubricated and/or have internal thermal overload

protection.

E. Outdoor fan motors shall be premium efficient motors.

2.6 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER

A. Heat exchanger integral with unit.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Casing:

1. Steel with standard factory-painted finish.

2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section.

3. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings having extended grease

fittings or permanently lubricated bearings. Support horizontal rotors on tapered roller

bearing.

C. Rotor: Aluminum segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes – OR - polymer segmented

wheel strengthened with radial spokes impregnated with nonmigrating, water-selective,

molecular-sieve desiccant coating.

1. The media must be coated to resist corrosion.

2. All surfaces must be coated with a non-migrating desiccant layer to insure that adequate

latent capacity is provided. The desiccant coating must be firmly bounded to the

aluminum surface and will not be dislodged when challenged with high velocity air up to

5,000 feet per minute. Products that loose desiccant when served with high velocity air

are not acceptable.

3. The cassette must be a slide out design for service ability.

4. The media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water, or light detergent

without degrading the latent recovery.

D. Sensible and latent recovery efficiencies must be clearly documents through a testing program

conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84 and AHRI 1060. The testing must have

been conducted by a qualified independent organization. The performance test reports must be

provided for engineering review as part of the submittals for this project.

E. The rotor design shall ensure laminar airflow to minimize parasitic pressure loss and to optimize

the operating efficiency of the system fans. The pressure loss shall be accounted for in the

internal pressure loss of the unit.

F. The rotor media shall be permanent, with an anticipated life of 20 years. It must be tested in

accordance with ASTM Standard E-84 and provide smoke and flame spread ratings of less than

25 and 50 as required by NFPA 90A and UL 1995. A copy of the ASTM E-84 test report

confirming the method of test and results shall be provided with the submittal. Heat recovery

wheels incorporating “throw-away” media and tested to UL900 for Class 2 filters are not

acceptable.

G. The rotor shall be supplied with perimeter brush seals and face contract seals to minimize air

leakage and wheel bypass.

H. The rotor media shall be supported by a structural aluminum hub and aluminum reinforcing

spoke system. The rotor bearings must be greaseable and provide L10 life in excess of 20

years.

I. The cassette framework shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent corrosion.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


J. Drive:

1. The rotor must be driven by long-life polyurethane/polyester composite link belt system.

The rotor/cassette shall be designed so that belt can be removed or serviced without the

removal of the bearing.

2. Variable speed control is required for frost prevention, it must be accomplished by the

use of a factory installed and wired A/C inverter. The variable speed drive system shall

allow for a minimum 60:1 turndown ratio.

2.7 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Copper tubes mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin.

2. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The coils shall be

leak tested to 500 psig and pressure tested to 500 psig.

3. Coil shall be four interlaced rows

B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Coil shall have a fin designed for ease of cleaning.

2. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The coils shall be

leak tested to 500 psig and pressure tested to 500 psig.

3. Condenser coil shall be provided with factory installed hail guards.

2.8 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Lead/1st Circuit Compressor: Hermetic, digital scroll type compressor with ability to fully

modulate from 20% to 100%.

B. Lag/2nd Circuit Compressor: Hermetic, single stage compressor.

C. Each compressor shall have internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal

pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

D. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R-410A.

2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.

3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.

4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.

5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.

6. Minimum off-time relay.

7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.

8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


2.9 AIR FILTRATION

A. Unit shall be equipped with a 4-inched filter rack upstream of the evaporator with MERV 13

filters.

2.10 MODULATING INDIRECT GAS-FIRED FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 and

NFPA 54.

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas.

2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.

C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit and

approved for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils in units mounted outdoors.

Threaded gas connection shall terminate at manual shut-off valve provided with unit. Provide

capability for sidewall or thru-base gas piping

E. The unit shall have fully modulating, high turndown and indirect gas-fired heat. The heating

section will include high turn-down burners firing into individual stainless steel tubular heat

exchangers. The heat exchangers shall be constructed of type 409 stainless steel and be a tubular

design capable of draining internal condensate. External flue to be constructed of type stainless

steel and be fully insulated. Units with multiple heaters shall include one fully modulating high

turndown heater with additional on-off heater sections. Total heater turndown shall be a

minimum of 10:1 or higher.

F. Timed freeze stat shall monitor heat output and shall discontinue all heating attempts and or unit

operation in the event the heating section fails to ignite or fails to maintain programmed supply

air temperature/time.

G. Inducer fan shall be direct drive high pressure centrifugal type with two speeds and shall

include built- in thermal overload protection.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. Leakage Rate: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

1. Outdoor Air Damper.

2. Return Air Mixing Damper.

3. Exhaust/Relief air damper.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


C. Unit shall include a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly

constructed of galvanized steel, and air foil blades with rubber edge seals. Linkage shall be

concealed out of airstream, within the damper frame to reduce pressure and noise. Damper

assembly shall be controlled by a spring return two position or fully modulating actuator.

Dampers shall not be sized for air velocities exceeding 2000 fpm.

2.12 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted non-fused disconnect

switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent

protection.

B. Field wiring access to be provided thru base into isolated enclosure with removeable cover.

C. Provide overcurrent protection rated for capacity noted on the schedule.

D. Provide factory wired phase monitor.

2.13 ECONOMIZER SECTION

A. Provide, a factory installed power exhaust assembly that shall be designed to ventilate return air

to atmosphere.

B. Fan wheel shall be direct drive plenum fan, factory installed and wired to on-board Variable

Frequency Drive Other fan construction is not acceptable.

C. Fan mount to be fixed.

D. Economizer to be provided with modulating outdoor air and return air dampers for enthalpy

control.

2.14 SOUND ATTENUATION PACKAGE

A. The unit is equipped with variable speed, ECM or VFD controlled condenser fans to reduce

sound and increase performance.

B. Unit must be provided with active head pressure control.

C. Compressor sound blanket must also be provided.

D. Sound Power: Radiated from condenser casing for RTU-1 & RTU-2

1. 1st Octave: 68.7 dB.

2. 2nd Octave: 79.5 dB.

3. 3rd Octave: 84.8 dB.

4. 4th Octave: 88.8 dB.





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA




9. Total: 92.9 dBA

2.15 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital

Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer.

2. Unit-Mounted Touch Screen Panel for Each Unit:

a. Display showing cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or

failure.

b. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air

temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control

parameters. Adjusting set points.

c. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation.

d. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads.

e. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation.

f. Monitoring cooling load.

g. Monitoring economizer cycles.

h. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.

C. DDC Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.

2. Provide BACnet compatible interface to BAS.

3. Discharge Air Control with BACNET

a. The resident control algorithms will make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating

decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor

temperature and humidity as well as input from the BAS indoor space temperature.

The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature control, minimizes drift

from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized micro-

processor will provide anti-short cycle timing for a higher level of machine

protection. Terminals are provided for a field installed dry contact or switch

closure to put the unit in the Occupied or Unoccupied modes.

4. Multi Zone VAV Control with BACNET

a. The resident control algorithms will make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating

decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor

temperature and humidity as well as signals from the BAS. The control algorithm

maintains accurate temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and

provides better building comfort. A centralized micro-processor will provide anti-

short cycle timing for a higher level of machine protection. Terminals are



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


provided for a field installed dry contact or switch closure to put the unit in the

Occupied or Unoccupied modes. A factory provided static pressure sensor will be

shipped with the unit for installation inside the supply ductwork.

2.16 ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include

transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

B. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter

pressure loss.

C. Safeties:

1. Provision for connection of smoke detector (provided by others).

2. Condensate overflow switch.

3. Phase-loss protection.

4. High and low pressure control.

5. Gas furnace airflow-proving switch.

D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

F. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.

G. Outdoor-air intake weather hood with moisture eliminator.

H. Oil separator.

I. Service Lights and Switch: Factory installed in fan section with weatherproof cover. Factory

wire lights to a single-point field connection.

2.17 ROOF CURBS

A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-

installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal

surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

cabinet.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric

depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.

B. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches (355 mm) with vibration isolation with 1-inch spring

deflection, 18 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing

and wood nailer strips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's

"NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof

penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing with anchor

bolts.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.

2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."

4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.

B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest

roof drain or area drain.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to RTUs, allow space for service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-

Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with

union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

D. Connect electrical wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

E. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


F. Install nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection.


A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.


proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

C. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-

distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.

END OF SECTION 237416.11



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA

FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 238236 - 1

SECTION 238236 - FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric radiation heaters.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures.

4. Indicate location and size of each field connection.

5. Include enclosure joints and other accessories.

6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Provide color samples – Runtal colors Grey Brown 8019 and Runtal White 9010R.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATERS


following:

1. Runtal North America, Inc.

2. INDECCO

ksloup





ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


B. Description: Factory-packaged units constructed according to UL 499, UL 1030, and UL 2021.

1. The heating panel shall be of one-piece construction, consisting of flattened panels

welded to floor pedestals.

2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element enclosed in metallic sheath

mechanically bonded to fins, with high-temperature cutout and sensor running the full length of

the element. Element supports shall eliminate thermal expansion noise.

D. Dimension: Radiator is 10.125-inches tall and a 2.25-inch depth. Provide with the scheduled

lengths, heating capacities and style as scheduled.

E. Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Pedestal-mounting bracket shall be solid panel matching front panel

and include a cover to conceal conduit for power and control wiring.

F. Support Brackets: Provide intermediate wall brackets for support as required to maintain UL

listing.

G. Cover: The radiators shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09-inch minimum) all-welded

perforated top grille, which will cover the top of all of the finned areas.

H. Finish: The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder

coat finish. The radiator is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint

thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002 to 0.003-inches). The color shall be selected from the standard

color finishes.

I. Accessories:

1. Pedestal trim knockout plugs for electrical connections.

2. Center trim cover for a wall-to-wall look.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.

C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.

D. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.

E. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to

extend to adjoining walls.



ASHLAND, NEBRASKA


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground electric finned-tube radiation heaters according to Section 260526 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:


proper operation.


equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A

A1

NO SOUND ATTENUATION

SOUND WALL MIN STC 49

B

B1



F

F1


WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BATT

D SHAFT WALL, 1 HOUR, STC 39

WALL TYPES

4" C-H METAL STUDS @ 24" O.C.

2 1/2" METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

6" METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

SOUND ATTENUATION BATTINSULATION

3-5/8" METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.


UL U419 FOR 1 HOUR PARTITIONS;REFER TO CP1.1 FOR LOCATIONS

1" SHAFT LINER

5/8" GYPSUM BOARD

UL U415 SYSTEM A

E

E1





(2) LAYERS 5/8" GWB

5/8" GWB

5/8" GWB EACH SIDE

5/8" GWB EACH SIDE

5/8" GWB

WHERE TILE IS DELINEATED ON ELEVATIONS:1-LAYER OF 5/8" TILE BACKING PANELS


C

C1





5/8" GWB


G

G1




5/8" GWB

8" CMU; REFER TO STRUCTURAL FORREINFORCEMENT LOCATIONS

J

J1



K NO SOUND ATTENUATION


5/8" GWB

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFIC NOTES(these notes are referenced in the “notes” column of the room finishschedules)

FLOOR NOTES:

F1. SEE SHEET A13.1 FOR FLOORING LOCATIONS ANDTRANSITIONS.

F2. THIN-SET CERAMIC TILE FLOORS.

F3. NOT USED

F4. NOT USED

F5. SEE DETAIL 15/A11.2 FOR FLOOR TILE TO WALL TILETRANSITION

WALL NOTES:

W1. SEE SHEET A12.1 FOR CERAMIC TILE WALL ELEVATIONS.

W2. CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT TO 5'-0" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR.

W3. PAINT EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS AND CROSS BRACING P-4.

W4. REFER TO SHEET A12.1 FOR WALL ELEVATIONS INDICATINGSPECIFIC WALL FINISH LOCATIONS.

W5. FRP PANEL TO 8'-0" (ONE PANEL HEIGHT) ABOVE FINISHFLOOR, PAINT REMAINDER OF WALL TO CEILING.

W6. SEE DETAIL 15/11.2 FOR TILE TO PAINTED GWB TRANSITION.

W7. PROVIDE PLYWOOD BACKBOARD WHERE INDICATED ONSPECIAL SYSTEMS PLANS. PLYWOOD TO BE 4' x 8', 3/4" THICK,INTERIOR-GRADE, FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED AND PAINTEDP-3. MOUNT 4" A.F.F.

W8. WALL FINISHES BY SUPPLIER

W9. ELEVATOR SHAFT PAINTED P-3 TO 10' A.F.F.

W10. LEVEL 5 GWB FINISH THIS ROOM FOR WALLCOVERINGINSTALLATION.

W11. WB-1 ON SOUTH WALL TO BE PAINTED P-2

W12. ENSURE THAT EACH COVE BASE GROUT LINE LINES UP WITH FLOOR TILE GROUT LINE.

CEILING NOTES:

C1. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR CEILING ACCENT PAINTCOLORS AND LOCATIONS.

C2. PAINT EXPOSED STEEL DECK P-4.

C2. PAINT EXPOSED STRUCTURE P-4, U.N.O.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:

M1. PAINT HANDRAILS P-4.

M2. PAINT MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AT STAIR (STRINGERS,HANDRAILS, STEEL PANS, ETC) P-4.

M3. GRANITE (GR-1) DRINK RAIL, THIS AREA.

CC-1

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES

A. ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL ROOMFINISH SCHEDULE SHEETS.

B. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING OF ITEMS NOT NOTED INTHE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE.

C. EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS NOT SCHEDULED TORECEIVE A FINISH SHALL RECEIVE A CURING AND SEALINGCOMPOUND UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

D. ALL GYPSUM WALLBOARD BULKHEADS SHALL BE PAINTED P-3UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

E. CEILING HEIGHTS, AS NOTED ON THE REFLECTED CEILING,PLANS ARE MEASURED FROM THE FINISH FLOOR OF THE ROOM.

F. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL WALL BASEAROUND CASEWORK AND MILLWORK.

G. WHERE FLOOR FINISH CHANGES FROM ONE ROOM TOANOTHER, SET JOINT OF THE MATERIALS AT THE CENTER OFTHE COMMUNICATING DOOR.

H. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES ANDHEIGHT.

I. WHERE WOOD BASE (WB-1) IS SPECIFIED, USE PAINTED POPLAR4" HIGH BY 1/2" DEEP. PRIMED ON ALL SIDES AND PAINTED P-1,U.N.O. SEE SPEC SECTION 064600.

J. SEE SHEET A9.1 FOR PAINTED DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES.K. SEE FINISH FLOOR PLANS FOR TILE CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS.

INTERIOR FINISH LIST

CARPET:

CPT-1:

• MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT• STYLE: EXPANSE TILE 5T219• COLOR: SLOPE 15518• SIZE: 12" x 48"• NOTES: STAGGER INSTALL• LOCATION: CARPET TILE RUG INSERTS• CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE

402-968-6025 [email protected]

CPT-2

• MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT• STYLE: EXPOSE TILE 5T151• COLOR: PAST 50515• SIZE: 9" x 36"• NOTES: ASHLAR INSTALL• LOCATION: CONFERENCE ROOMS• CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE


CPT-3

• MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT• STYLE: WELCOME II TILE 5T031• COLOR: BLACK CHOCOLATE 31751• SIZE: 24" x 24"• NOTES: QUARTER-TURN INSTALL• LOCATION: VESTIBULE• CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE


CPT-4

• MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT• STYLE: BEYOND 5A243• COLOR: SLOPE 15518• SIZE: BROADLOOM• LOCATION: FRONT STAIR• CONTACT: MICHELE LEISE


PAINT:

P-1:

• MANUFACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS• COLOR: SW 7030 ANEW GRAY• NOTES: TYPICAL WALL COLOR• PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC

P-2:

• MANUFACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS• COLOR: SW 9184 FOXHALL GREEN• NOTES: ACCENT WALL COLOR• PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC

P-3:

• MANUFACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS• COLOR: SW 7758 HIGH REFLECTIVE WHITE• PRODUCT: PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC

P-4:

• MANUFACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS• COLOR: SW7069 IRON ORE

STAIN:

ST-1:

• MANUFACTURER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS• COLOR: TO MATCH CEILING AT ROOM 105• LOCATION: SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR LOCATION• SPEC SECTION: 064600

VINYL WALLCOVERING:

VWC-1:

• MANUFACTURER: D.L. COUCH• STYLE: CONNEXION A164• COLOR: QUARRY 897• LOCATION: RECEPTION HALLS

ROLLER SHADES:

RS-1:

• MANUFACTURER: MECHOSHADE• STYLE: MECHO/5 DRIVE END BRACKET W/FASCIA• FABRIC: THERMOVEIL DENSE BASKET WEAVE• PATTERN: 1500 SERIES (3% OPEN)• COLOR: 1519 SILVER BIRCH• LOCATION: CONFERENCE ROOM 207

TILE:

CT-1:

• MANUFACTURER: DALTILE• STYLE: KEYSTONES• COLOR: DK16 ARCTIC WHITE/BLACK• SIZE: 1" HEXAGON• LOCATION: BATHROOM FLOOR TILE• GROUT: MAPEI, 47 CHARCOAL• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN


CT-2:

• MANUFACTURER: IRIS CERAMICS• STYLE: MAY• COLOR: OLIVE• SIZE: 4" x 8"• LOCATION: BATHROOM WAINSCOTTING• GROUT: MAPEI, 38 AVALANCHE• INSTALLATION: REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: ANDREA MCCUNE


CT-3:

• MANUFACTURER: DALTILE• STYLE: UPTOWN GLASS• COLOR: CARRARA UP23• SIZE: 1" HEXAGON• LOCATION: BAR FRONT• GROUT: MAPEI, 93 WARM GRAY• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN


PT-1:

• MANUFACTURER: FLORIDA TILE• STYLE: CELLAR• COLOR: TONE• SIZE: 8" x 36"• LOCATION: MAIN FLOOR TILE• GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE• INSTALLATION: ASHLAR• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: TARA MILLER


PT-2:

• MANUFACTURER: DALTILE• STYLE: VOLUME 1.0• COLOR: ACCENT BROWN VL78• SIZE: 12" x 12"• LOCATION: PREP AREAS• GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE• INSTALLATION: LAID STRAIGHT• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES:

RB-1:

• MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE• STYLE: WALL BASE• COLOR: 63 BURNT UMBER• SIZE: 4", COVED BASE AT HARD SURFACES, STRAIGHT BASE AT

CARPETED SURFACES

RST-1:

• MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE• STYLE: RUBBER TREAD WITH INTEGRAL RISER• COLOR: RAISED ROUNDS 63 BURNT UMBER, NO INSERT• SIZE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS• LOCATION: BACK OF HOUSE STAIRS

RT-1:

• MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE• COLOR: RAISED ROUNDS 63 BURNT UMBER• SIZE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS• LOCATION: BACK OF HOUSE STAIRS

MILLWORK

WV-1

• SPECIES: WALNUT• COLOR: TO MATCH PT-1• LOCATION: CONFERENCE ROOM AND BAR MILLWORK• SPEC SECTION: 064113

OS-1

• DISTRIBUTER: GMS WERKS• STONE: BROWN ONYX• SPEC SECTION: 123640• CONTACT: TERRY BORTOLOTTI


GR-1

• DISTRIBUTER: GMS WERKS• STONE: GRANIITE, COLOR TBD, $70/SF INSTALL ALLOWANCE• CONTACT: TERRY BORTOLOTTI


QS-1

• MANUFACTURER: DUPONT• STYLE: ZODIAQ QUARTZ• COLOR: NEVE• LOCATION: BATHROOM AND CONFERENCE COUNTERTOPS

QS-2

• MANUFACTURER: DUPONT• STYLE: ZODIAQ QUARTZ• COLOR: PAPYRUS• LOCATION: BACK BAR COUNTERTOPS• GRID: SUPRAFINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE

SURFACE:

1. EXPOSED CONCRETE AND PRECASTCONCRETE CEILINGS, INCLUDINGCONDUITS, JUNCTION BOXES, PENDANTS,PIPE, FITTINGS, DUCTS, DIFFUSERS,GRILLES, REGISTERS, ETC:

2. EXPSOED STRUCTURE3. TRUSSES:4. EXPOSED JOISTS:5. STEEL COLUMNS:6. OTHER STRUCTURAL STEEL:7. METAL HANDRAILS AND BRACKETS:8. WOOD BASE:9. HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES:10. HOLLOW METAL SIDELITES:11. HOLLOW METAL TRANSOMS:12. WOOD DOOR FRAMES:13. WOOD SIDELITES:14. WOOD TRANSOMS:15. WOOD WINDOW FRAMES:16. METAL DOOR AND FRAMES OF ELEVATORS:17. FLOOR ACCESS DOOR:18. WALL ACCESS DOOR:19. CEILING ACCESS DOOR:

COLOR:

AS SCHEDULEDAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSMATCH SURFACE ON WHICH IT OCCURSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSAS NOTED ON DRAWINGSMATCH SURFACE ON WHICH IT OCCURSMATCH SURFACE ON WHICH IT OCCURSMATCH SURFACE ON WHICH IT OCCURS

SHEEN:

EGGSHELLEGGSHELLSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSEGGSHELLSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSSEMI-GLOSSEGGSHELLEGGSHELLEGGSHELL

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS:

APC-1

• MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG• STYLE: ULTIMA• COLOR: WHITE• SIZE: 24" X 24"• GRID: SUPRAFINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE

APC-2

• MANUFACTURER: AMERICAN TIN CEILINGS• STYLE: #23• COLOR: ARTISAN SILVER WASHED GOLD• SIZE: 24" X 24"• GRID: SUPRAFINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE

APC-3

• MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG• STYLE: KITCHEN ZONE• COLOR: WHITE• SIZE: 24" X 24"• GRID: SUPRAFINE XL 9/16" EXPOSED TEE

EXTERIOR PAINTS:

CLAY MASONRY UNITS:

• COLOR: P-1• SYSTEM: MPI EXT 4.1A• INTERMEDIATE COAT: LATEX, EXTERIOR, MATCH TOPCOAT• TOPCOAT: MPI #11 GLOSS LEVEL 5

STEEL AND IRON SUBSTRATES:

• COLOR: P-4• SYSTEM: MPI EXT 5.1C• PRIMER COAT: ALKYD, ANTI-CORROSIVE FOR METAL, MPI #79• INTERMEDIATE COAT: LIGHT INDUSTRIAL, EXTERIOR, WATER BASE, MATCHING TOPCOAT• TOPCOAT: MPI # 163 GLOSS LEVEL 5

WOOD SUBSTRATES: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:

• COLOR: MATCH ARCHITECTS SAMPLE• SYSTEM: MPI EXT 6.3L• PRIMECOAT: PRIMER, LATEX FOR EXTERIOR WOOD, MPI #6• INTERMEDIATE COAT: LATEX, EXTERIOR, MATCHING TOPCOAT• TOPCOAT: MPI #11 GLOSS LEVEL 5

CC-1

PB-2:

• MANUFACTURER: DALTILE• STYLE: VOLUME 1.0• COLOR: ACCENT BROWN VL78• SIZE: COVE BASE 6" X 12"• NUMBER: P-36C9• LOCATION: PREP AREAS• GROUT: MAPEI, 04 BAHAMA BEIGE• INSTALLATION: LAID STRAIGHT• SPEC SECTION: 093013• CONTACT: AMANDA BALHORN


CC-1

CC-1

1. GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS

2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE ACTUAL AND ARE TO FACE OF METALSTUDS, FACE OF MASONRY, FACE OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ORCENTERLINE OF COLUMN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL 2" X 6" CONTINUOUSWOOD BLOCKING OR FLAT METAL STRAPPING IN STUD PARTITIONSFOR ANCHORAGE OF WALL ATTACHED ITEMS, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: GRAB BARS, VANITY UNITS,TOILET ACCESSORIES, WALL CABINETS, AND WALL MOUNTEDFIXTURES

4. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALLMECHANICAL CHASE SIZES WITH MECHANICALSUBCONTRACTOR.

5. WALL OPENINGS FOR FIRE DAMPERS SHALL BE FRAMED PERTHE FIRE DAMPER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

6. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SIZES ANDLOCATIONS OF 4" HIGH CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADSWITH THE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTSUPPLIERS.

7. LOCATE CONTROL JOINTS (CJ) AND CONTROL JOINTS ABOVE(CJA) WHERE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. SEE DETAILSON A10.1 AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ISOLATE GYPSUMBOARD SURFACES WITH CONTROL JOINTS WHERE:A) CEILING ABUTS A STRUCTURAL ELEMENT,

DISSIMILAR WALL OR PARTITION OR OTHER VERTICAL PENETRATION.B) CONSTRUCTION CHANGES WITHIN PLANES OF THE

CEILING.C) CEILING RUN EXCEEDS 30 LINEAL FEET.D) CONTROL JOINTS OCCUR IN STRUCTURAL

ELEMENTS OF THE BUILDING.E) PARTITION OR FURRING RUN EXCEEDING 30 L.F.

8. ELECTRICAL PLANS INDICATE THE GENERAL DESIGN ANDARRANGEMENT OF PIPES, CONDUIT, WIRING, EQUIPMENT,SYSTEMS, ETC. INFORMATION SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATICIN CHARACTER AND DOES NOT NECESSARILY INDICATEEVERY REQUIRED OFFSET, FITTING AND EXISTINGCONDITION. LOCATION OF THESE ITEMS MAY BE ADJUSTEDCONDITIONAL UPON THE SATISFACTORY COMPLIANCEWITH ALL OTHER REQUIREMENTS.

9. SEE PLANS FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER (FE) AND FIREEXTINGUISHER CABINET (FEC) LOCATIONS.

10. SEE SHEET CP1.1 FOR LOCATIONS OF FIRE RATED WALLS WHERE APPLICABLE.

11. ALL WALL PENETRATIONS AT RATED WALL LOCATIONSREQUIRED FOR PIPES, CONDUIT, DUCTING ETC. SHALL BESEALED TO STOP PASSAGE OF FIRE AND / OR SMOKE WITHFIRE SAFING AND APPROVED FIRESTOPPING SEALANT PERDETAILS ON SHEET CP1.2

12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE CUT-OUTS FOR CASEWORK, MILLWORK, OR OTHEREQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED.

14. ALL ASPECTS OF THE WORK AND ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLYMENTIONED, BUT WHICH ARE NECESSARY TO MAKE ACOMPLETE WORKING INSTALLATION, SHALL BE INCLUDED,AND INDICATED IN THE CONTRACTORS BID.

15. NO ASBESTOS OR PCB CONTAINING MATERIALS SHALL BEUSED ON THIS PROJECT.

16. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ALL SUBCONTRACTORSARE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROPER REMOVAL AND DISPOSALOF ALL DEBRIS GENERATED BY CONSTRUCTION OF THISPROJECT. THE REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ALLCONSTRUCTION DEBRIS SHALL BE IN FULL COMPLIANCEWITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS. THEPREMISES SHALL BE KEPT CLEAN AND FREE FROM ALLWASTE MATERIALS.

17. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT NEWCONSTRUCTION FROM DAMAGE BY ALL TRADES. ALLSUCH DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR DURINGTHE COURSE OF THIS WORK SHALL BE REPAIRED ORREPLACED AT THE CONTRACTORS EXPENSE.

18. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELDVERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELDCONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING OR INSTALLINGMATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT.

19. ALL PIPING AND CONDUITS SHALL BE CONCEALEDWITHIN WALLS, UNDERGROUND, ABOVE CEILINGS OR INARCHITECT APPROVED UTILITY SPACES IN ALL CASESUNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THEDRAWINGS. EXPOSED ITEMS MUST BE LOCATED INAREAS APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. EXPOSEDITEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND FINISHED TO PROVIDEMINIMAL VISUAL IMPACT. ALL EXPOSED ITEMS ARE TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACESUNLESS SCHEDULED FOR AN ACCENT COLOR.

20. FLOOR SPOT ELEVATIONS ARE SHOWN THUS: 0'-0"

21. ARCHITECTURAL FINISH FLOOR ELEVATIONS 100'-0"EQUALS ACTUAL SITE REFERENCE OF FINISH FLOOR: 94.59

22. PLAN SYMBOL INDICATES WALL TYPE - SEE SHEET A0.1FOR DESCRIPTION OF WALL TYPES

23. SCRIBE GYPSUM BOARD OF WALLS AND PARTITIONS TOIRREGULARITIES OF STRUCTURE AND ROOF DECK ABOVE.

24. PROVISIONS SHALL BE MADE AT FULL HEIGHT NON-BEARING WALLS FOR 2- INCH VERTICAL MOVEMENT OFTHE BUILDING STRUCTURE WITHOUT TRANSFER OFCOMPRESSIVE LOADS TO WALL. FILL IRREGULARITIESBETWEEN TOP OF WALL AND DECK ABOVE WITH FIRESAFING INSULATION OR FIRE STOPPING MATERIALS ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIRE RATING OF RESPECTIVEWALLS. FILL AT SMOKE PARTITIONS WITH MATERIALSCAPABLE OF RESISTING THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE. SEEDETAILS ON CODE RATING DETAIL SHEETS.

25. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR BRACING OF NONLOADBEARING MASONRY WALLS.

26. MASONRY WALLS AND INTERIOR STUD WALLS SHALL EXTENDTO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR OR ROOF DECK ABOVE UNLESSNOTED OTHERWISE. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES.

27. SEAL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATEDCONSTRUCTIONS WITH THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOPMATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE RESPECTIVE FIRE-RESISTIVE RATING AND SMOKE STOPPAGE. SEE DETAILS ONSHEET CP1.1

GENERAL NOTES

WALL TYPE GENERAL NOTES

A. THE SIDE OF THE PARTITION THAT THE WALL TYPE SYMBOL ISLOCATED ON (AS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLANS), INDICATES THESIDE OF THE PARTITION TO RECEIVE DOUBLE LAYER GYPSUMBOARD.

B. SEE CP1.1 FOR LOCATIONS OF FIRE RATED WALLS AND SMOKEPARTITIONS.

C. REFER TO THE GENERAL NOTES ON SHEET A0.1 FOR ADDITIONALREQUIREMENTS REGARDING GWB PARTITIONS.

D. CONSTRUCT FIRE RATED GWB PARTITIONS ACCORDING TO FIRERATED ASSEMBLIES INDICATED BELOW WALL TYPE.

E. SEE DETAIL 31/A10.1 FOR GWB PARTITION SLIP CONNECTIONBELOW FLOOR AND ROOF DECKS.

F. SEE DETAIL 52/A10.1 FOR CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS AT DOORFRAMES LOCATED IN GWB PARTITIONS.

G. SOUND WALLS ARE INDICATED BY THE STC RATING BELOW WALLTYPE. SEE DETAIL 45/A10.1 AND 56/A10.1 FOR SOUND WALLDETAILS. SEAL PERIMETER OF SOUND WALLS WITH ACOUSTICALSEALANT.

H. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STEEL STUD WALL FRAMINGDETAILS.

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

6:4

8 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

GE

NE

RA

L N

OT

ES

, R

OO

M F

INIS

H S

CH

ED

ULE

& W

ALL T

YP

ES

A0.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

_ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE_

ROOM

FLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH

WALLCeiling Finish

COMMENTSNUMBER NAME MATERIAL NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST

0S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 - F1, M1, M2

0S4 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK EXIST EXIST - - - F1

001 STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 -

1E1 ELEVATOR PT-1 - - - - - - - F2, W9

1S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 - F1, M1, M2

1S2 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 F1, M1, M2

1S3 STAIR CPT-4 WD-1 BRICK P-1 EXIST P-1 EXIST EXISTING F2

1S4 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 - F1

002 STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 -

2S1 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 GWB/BRICK P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 P-3 F1, M1, M2

2S2 STAIR RT-1/RST-1 RB-1 CMU/GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 F1, M1, M2

2S3 STAIR PT-1/CPT-4 WD-1 GWB/BRICK EXIST EXIST - EXIST P-4 F2

100 VESTIBULE CPT-3 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 - ST-1/P-4 W3

101 RETAIL PT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST BRICK - EXIST BRICK ST-1/P-4 F2, W3

102 TASTING ROOM PT-1/CT-3/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB - EXIST P-1 EXIST ST-1/P-4 F1, F2, W1, W3

103 STORAGE PT-1 RB-1 GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 - F2

104 STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 - F2

105 LOUNGE PT-1/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST P-1 EXIST EXISTING F1, F2

106 WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 - P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

107 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 - P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

108 CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK - P-1 EXIST P-1 - F2

109 RECEPTION HALL PT-1 WB-1 GWB VWC-1/EXIST VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-4 F2, W3, W4, W10

110 CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB - VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-3 F2, W10

111 A/V SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 - W7

112 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

113 WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 CT-1/P-2 P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

114 MECH/ELEC SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3

115 CONFERENCE ROOM CPT-2 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-2 P-1 P-1 P-3

116 CATERING STAGING PT-2 PB-2 GWB FRP-1/P-1 FRP-1/P-1 FRP-1/P-1 FRP-1/P-1 P-3 F2, W5, W12

117 STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB/CMU P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3

118 OFFICE CPT-1 RB-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 -

119 BAR CT-3 - BRICK - EXIST BRICK - EXIST BRICK ST-1/P-4 F2

120 FOOD PREP PT-2 PB-2 GWB FRP-1/P-1 FRP-1/P-1/CT-2 FRP-1/P-1 FRP-1/P-1 - W5, W12

121 MECH/ELEC/CUST PT-2 PB-2 GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 - W12

122 KEG COOLER PT-2 PB-2 GWB - - - - - W8, W12

123 PRIVATE TASTING PT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB P-1 EXIST P-2 EXIST ST-1/P-4 F2, W3, W11

124 CHASE

201 BAR PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK - - P-1 EXIST P-4 F2

202 GALLERY PT-1/CPT-1 WB-1 BRICK/GWB - EXIST P-1 EXIST/P-1 P-4 F1, F2, W1, W3

203 WOMEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

204 MEN'S RESTROOM CT-1 - GWB CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 CT-2/P-1 P-3 F2, F5, W1, W2, W4, W6

205 CORRIDOR PT-1 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 EXIST P-1 - F2

206 RECEPTION HALL PT-1 WB-1 GWB/BRICK VWC-1/EXIST VWC-1 VWC-1 VWC-1 P-4 F2, W3, W4, W10

207 CONFERENCE ROOM CPT-2 WB-1 GWB P-1 P-1 P-2 P-1 P-3

208 STORAGE SC-1 RB-1 GWB/BRICK P-3 EXIST EXIST P-3 P-3 F2

209 MECH/ELEC SC-1 RB-1 BRICK/GWB P-3 EXIST P-3 P-3 P-3

210 CATERING STAGING PT-2 PB-2 GWB P-1 P-1 P-1 P-1 - F2, W12

211 ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM SC-1 - GWB P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 P-3 F2

212 ELEVATOR LOBBY PT-1 WD-1 GWB/BRICK WVC-1 VWC-1 - EXIST P-4 F2

213 OUTDOOR SEATING - - - - - - - - M3

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

UP

RE

F.

UP

UP

RE

F.

UP

A5.123

A5.1

A5.1

A5.1

21

43

41

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102LOUNGE

105

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

2

3

7

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CORRIDOR

108

60' - 8"

A.5 B

A2.1

21

A8.1

15

A8.2

26

51

A7.1

53

A7.1

54

A7.2

26

A7.2

54

A7.1

55

A7.1

STAIR

1S1

BAR

119

D

29' - 0" 11' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 4" 9' - 8"

8

2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' - 11 1/2"

C

1

VE

RIF

Y13

' - 5

5/8

"20

' - 0

"8'

- 3

"11

' - 6

"13

' - 3

"1'

- 3

"12

' - 9

"10

' - 5

"2'

- 6

"14

' - 0

"

E

5' -

0"

4' -

4"

4' -

0"

22' - 0"

2' - 0"

10' - 0"

2' - 0"

9' - 0" 4' - 4" 11' - 4"

70' -

4"

5

4

A2.1

23

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

A11.111

12

13

14

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

52

A7.1

STAIR

1S3

STAIR

1S4

106

107

108

1S2A

1S2B 112 113

114

115

116

117

118

120

123

51

A7.2

7"6' - 0"

7"3' - 0"

2"

3' - 0"

2"

3' - 0"

2"

3' - 0"

6 1/2"

1' - 9"

1' - 4"

3' - 4"

1' - 4"

3' - 4"

1' - 4"

3' - 4" FV2' - 4"

STORAGE

104

CHASE

124

A/V

111

C

B1A1

A1

A

A1

A1

A1

A1

C

C

CORRIDOR

110

A12.1 11

A12.114 13

6

3/4"

6"

39' - 5 1/4" 1' - 9" 6' - 8" 9' - 7"

17' -

4"

2' -

11"

2' - 8"

111

8' -

6"

4' -

10"

5' -

9"

14' -

5"

18' -

11"

1' -

10"

4' -

0"

22' -

0"

22' -

0"

14' -

8"

8" 24' - 3" 6' - 6"

A10.1

51

1S1

121

122

105B

103

104

109A 109B

105A

1S3

A1

A5

A7

A8

55

A7.2

A10

A1124

A11.1

116A

1S4

110

DD

C

C

A

2' -

2"

4' -

11"

30' -

6"

4' -

9"

ICE

A8.1

24

A1

A13A13

A13A13

A16

A17

A7

A17

A18

A11

F

A20

26

A7.1

100A

119

A2

A21

A23

2' - 9" 9' - 0"

100B

VESTIBULE

100

6' -

1"

6' - 2" 3' - 1"

A26

VE

RIF

Y

20' -

7 1

/2"

J

K

F

23' -

0"

VE

RIF

Y W

/ A/V

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

12' -

2"

K

A27

A28

A28

TO FINISH FACE4 1/4"

A29

A11

32

A11.2

32

A11.2

118A

FF

OFFICE

118

C

C

C

C A1

A10

D

2' -

0"

7' - 6"

A.1

2.1

3.9

B1

A

A

G

A

A

A10.1

41

35/ A11.2

35/ A11.2

1' - 7 1/4"

2' -

6"

1' - 2"

A30

A30

AA

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJCJ

CJCJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

4' -

0"

16' -

8"

20' -

0"

A10

A10

CC-1

A35

CC-1

2

3

A.5 B

STORAGE

001

STORAGE

002

C

1

5

4

5' -

6"

4' -

4"

5' - 3"

STAIR

0S4STAIR

0S1

0S1

51

A7.2

6

A13A13

A14

AA

AA

A15

F

A24

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' - 11 1/2"

11' -

6"

13' -

3"

1' -

3"

12' -

9"

10' -

5"

2' -

6"

14' -

0"

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTES

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

0:2

4 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

FLO

OR

PLA

N, B

AS

EM

EN

T &

MA

INA1.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

NORTHSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

FLOOR PLAN - MAIN LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

FLOOR PLAN - BASEMENT LEVEL

KEYNOTE LEGEND

A1 ACCESS PANEL; PAINT TO MATCH WALL COLOR

A2 RETAIL SHELVING CONSTRUCTED FROM RECLAIMED CEILINGJOISTS

A5 4" INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL COOLER PANELS BY FOODSERVICE CONTR

A7 24"X24" MOP SINK

A8 POST INDICATOR VALVE; SEE MECHANICAL

A10 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SEE FOOD SERVICE DRAWINGS

A11 HAND WASHING SINK; SEE PLUMBING

A13 WOOD HANDRAIL; SEE A8.1 FOR HANDRAIL DETAILS

A14 ADD 1-LAYER OF 5/8" TYPE X GWB THIS SIDE OF WALL

A15 CONCRETE FOUNDATION; SEE STRUCTURAL

A16 INFILL WINDOW WITH SALVAGED BRICK; TOOTH IN ATPERIMETER

A17 SEMI-RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET

A18 BOLLARD, TYP; SEE CIVIL

A20 ADD (1) ROW OF CABLE TO TOP OF ALL RAILINGS TO REDUCEOPENING TO LESS THAN 4".

A21 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE AT THE HEAD OF ALLEXISTING WINDOWS, TYPICAL. REPLACE DAMAGED SCREENS ASREQUIRED. REPAIR AND PAINT WINDOW TRIM P-4, TYPICAL.

A23 PAINT WOOD GUARDRAIL CAP

A24 HELICAL PIERS; SEE STRUCTURAL

A26 FABRIC AWNING ABOVE

A27 RECESSED VIDEO SCREEN BY A/V CONTRACTOR; MAINTAIN 1"PERIMETER GAP AROUND SIDES AND BOTTOM OF VIDEOSCREEN, 4" AT TOP; COORDINATE WALL RECESSED DIMENSIONWITH A/V CONTRACTOR

A28 TV BY OWNER; SEE ELECTRICAL

A29 RESTORED DECORATIVE LEADED GLASS WINDOW; HANG FROMSTRUCTURE ABOVE

A30 STRUCTURAL STOOP; SEE STRUCTURE

A35 REMOVABLE PANEL ABOVE FOR MECHANICAL UNIT ACCESS;COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. PAINT PANELTO MATCH ADJANCT SUFACE.

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

CC-1

UP

UP

UP

UP

A5.123

A5.1

A5.1

A5.1

21

43

41

GALLERY

202

OUTDOORSEATING

213

STORAGE

208

CONFERENCEROOM

207

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

2

3

7

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

STAIR

2S3

STAIR

2S1

RECEPTIONHALL

206

A.5 B

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

A8.1

25

A2.1

22

A8.2

16

51

A7.1

53

A7.1

54

A7.2

26

A7.2

54

A7.1

55

A7.1

BAR

201

CORRIDOR

205

A5.1

51

D

8

C

1

E

29' - 0" 11' - 0" 18' - 0"

A5.153

5

4

52

A7.1

203

204

2S2208

209

210

211

212

51

A7.2

22' - 0" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 20' - 8"

ELEVATORLOBBY

212

23/ A11.1

J

A1

A1

A1 A1

A1

A1

A1A1

A12.115

70' -

4"

6

12' - 8 1/8"1' - 4"

7 1/2" 22' - 11 1/2"

8"

6' - 6"

18' -

11"

20' -

2"

3' -

6"

202

205

A1

55

A7.2

210A

A12A12

16' -

6"

3' -

8"

A11.1 2221

A13A13

3/4"

6"22' - 3 1/2" 17' - 2" 8' - 5"

2S1

C

C

K

A16

A7

F

A19

A20

20' -

0"

8' -

3"

11' -

6"

13' -

3"

1' -

3"

12' -

9"

10' -

5"

2' -

6"

14' -

0"

26

A7.1

A21

A21

A21

A21

A23

33

A11.2

G

FF FF

C

F VE

RIF

Y W

/ A/V

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

12' -

2"

21' -

10"

A27

A28

TO FINISH FACE4 1/4"

A11

A10

8' -

0"

7' -

6"

3' -

5"

2' - 0"

1' - 0"

A.1

2.1

3.9

D

D

D

CC

A

G

ELEVATOR

2E1

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJ

CJCJ

A31

4' -

0"

16' -

8"

20' -

0"

4' -

0"

22' -

0"

22' -

0"

14' -

8"

7' -

8"

2' - 3" 12' - 5" 19' - 7" 17' - 11 1/2"

A33

A34

CC-1

CC-1

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTES

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

0:2

4 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

FLO

OR

PLA

N, U

PP

ER

LE

VE

LA1.2

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


FLOOR PLAN - UPPER LEVEL

KEYNOTE LEGEND

A7 24"X24" MOP SINK

A10 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SEE FOOD SERVICE DRAWINGS

A11 HAND WASHING SINK; SEE PLUMBING

A12 PORCELAIN ROOF PAVERS ON PEDESTAL SYSTEM

A13 WOOD HANDRAIL; SEE A8.1 FOR HANDRAIL DETAILS

A16 INFILL WINDOW WITH SALVAGED BRICK; TOOTH IN ATPERIMETER

A19 NEW CABLE RAILING AT INTERMEDIATE LANDING; MATCHEXISTING SPACING AND DIMENSIONS OF CABLES ANDSUPPORTS. ADD (1) ROW OF CABLE TO TOP OF ALL RAILINGSTO REDUCE OPENING TO LESS THAN 4".

A20 ADD (1) ROW OF CABLE TO TOP OF ALL RAILINGS TO REDUCEOPENING TO LESS THAN 4".

A21 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE AT THE HEAD OF ALLEXISTING WINDOWS, TYPICAL. REPLACE DAMAGED SCREENSAS REQUIRED. REPAIR AND PAINT WINDOW TRIM P-4, TYPICAL.

A23 PAINT WOOD GUARDRAIL CAP

A27 RECESSED VIDEO SCREEN BY A/V CONTRACTOR; MAINTAIN 1"PERIMETER GAP AROUND SIDES AND BOTTOM OF VIDEOSCREEN, 4" AT TOP; COORDINATE WALL RECESSED DIMENSIONWITH A/V CONTRACTOR

A28 TV BY OWNER; SEE ELECTRICAL

A31 ROOF HATCH LADDER

A33 PREP AND PAINT EXISTING EXTERIOR BRICK; SEE A0.1 FORPAINT COLOR

A34 PREP AND PAINT EXISTING EXTERIOR METAL PANEL; SEE A0.1FOR PAINT COLOR

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

CC-1

UP

51

A7.1

53

A7.1

54

A7.2

26

A7.2

54

A7.1

55

A7.1

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

52

A7.1

51

A7.2

1/4" / 12"1/4" / 12"

1/4" / 12"

6

1/4" / 12"

55

A7.2

F

26

A7.1

R2

R2

R2

R2

R1R1

R5

R3

R6

R4

R7

R3

R3

10' - 0" 10' - 0" 10' - 0"

10' -

0"

10' -

0"

10' -

0"

5' -

0"

5' - 0"

R8

34

A11.2

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

2' - 8"CC-1

5' -

0"

4"M

IN

1'-0

"M

IN

1'-0"

MIN

1'-0"MIN

4" MIN

SHEET METAL CAP

CONDENSING UNIT PIPING

SHEET METAL COVERED CURB

ROOFING MEMBRANE W/TERMINATION BAR AND SEALANT

PERIMETER CANTS

LINE OF SHEET METAL, EXTENDUNDER ROOF MEMBRANE

CONT SEALANT AROUNDPIPE PENETRATION

SHEET METAL SCREWS AT EACH SIDE

CLOSURE DETAIL

8"

GALV PIPE CONDUIT - SEE ELECTRICAL

LAP SEALANT

SS CLAMPING RING

PRE-MOLDED PIPE BOOT

LAP SEALANT

ROOF MEMBRANE

T&G DECK - SEE STRUCTURAL

WOOD JOIST - SEE STRUCTURAL

PIPE CLAMP TOP AND BOTTOM; PAINT TOMATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR,TYPICAL FOR ALL CONDUIT RUNNINGAGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE

CONDUIT; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSEDSTRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL FOR ALLCONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSEDSTRUCTURE

1/4"

/ F

TS

LOP

E1/

4" /

FT

SLO

PE

1' - 6" 2' - 0" 1' - 6"

1' -

2"

1' -

6"

+0" +0"

24" x 24" SUMPRECEIVER BY MECH

OVERFLOW DRAIN BY MECH

ROOF DRAIN BY MECH41

A4.1

+3/4" +3/4"

ROOF DRAIN LAYOUT AT SLOPED DECK WITH TAPERED INSULATION

CENTERLINEOF VALLEY

TAPERED INSULATION

1/4"

/ F

TS

LOP

E

1' -

6"

2' -

0"

1' -

6"

1' - 6"

+0"

+0"

24" x 24" SUMPRECEIVER BY MECH

OVERFLOW DRAIN BY MECH

ROOF DRAIN BY MECH

41A4.1

+3/4"

ROOF DRAIN LAYOUT AT SLOPED DECK WITH TAPERED INSULATION

CENTERLINEOF VALLEY

TAPERED INSULATION

+3/4"

1/4"

/ F

TS

LOP

E

7"4"

2"

R2"

2"

PLUG AND SEAL END OF PIPE CONDUIT

2" GALV PIPE CONDUIT FORCOMM/CABLE ROUTING

LAP SEALANT

TOP OF PARAPET BEYOND

SS CLAMPING RING

PRE-MOLDED PIPE BOOT

LAP SEALANT

ROOF MEMBRANE

T&G DECK - SEE STRUCTURAL

VA

RIE

S

PIPE CLAMP TOP AND BOTTOM; PAINT TOMATCH EXPOSED STRUCTURE COLOR,TYPICAL FOR ALL CONDUIT RUNNINGAGAINST EXPOSED STRUCTURE

CONDUIT; PAINT TO MATCH EXPOSEDSTRUCTURE COLOR, TYPICAL FOR ALLCONDUIT RUNNING AGAINST EXPOSEDSTRUCTURE

WOOD JOIST - SEE STRUCTURAL

PORCELAIN PLAZA PAVER

COMPENSATOR

3 5/

8"

HIGH POINT OF SLOPE WHER OCCURS

MINIMUM SPACE FOR COMPENSATOR (1 5/8")AND ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL (2")

ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL

PLAZAMATE INSULATION

ROOF MEMBRANE

COVER BOARD

TAPERED INSULATION

BASE INSULATIONROOF DRAINS

ROOF STRUCTURE

1/2"

VA

RIE

S

1 1/

2"3 5/

8"

3/4"

1 1/

2"

VAPOR BARRIER

1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING

OPENING DIMENSION

1/4" STEEL TRIM ANGLE -CONT. AROUND OPENING

ROOF ACCESS LADDER,NOT SHOWN

ROOF ASSEMBLY

CONT. SEALANT

BASE FLASHING

ROOF ACCESS HATCH

VA

RIE

S1/

2"

MIN8"

1 1/

2"

T&G DECKING

2" BASE LAYER INSULATION

TOP OF JOIST111' - 7"

1' -

9 1

/4"

TAPERED POLYISO INSULATION(FLAT 1/2" OF INSUL+ TAPER)

COVER BOARDSINGLE PLY MEMBRANE

1 1/2" PLAZAMATE INSULATION

ADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL

3/4" PORCELAIN PLAZA DECK PAVER

PLAZA DECK113' - 4 1/4"

TERMINATION BARWITH SEALANT

MIN SPACE FORCOMPENSATOR (1-5/8") ANDADJUSTABLE PEDESTAL (2")

3 5/

8"

12"1/4"

VAPOR BARRIER

1 1/

2"

WALL; SEE PLAN


C OF STEEL BEAM, STEEL JOISTOR MASONRY BEARING WALL

C OF VALLEYL C OF ROOF DRAINL

24" x 24" SUMP RECEIVER

1'-6"1'-2" TYPICAL1'-4" @ 12" CMU

+0"

12"1/4"

12"1/4"

+3/4"

L 3" x 3" x 1/4" FRAME

UNDER DECK CLAMP

PIPE INSULATION

LINE OF ROOF SLOPE BEYOND

ROOF MEMBRANE

COVER BOARD

TAPERED INSULATION

T&G DECKING -SEE STRUCTURAL

ROOF INSULATION

1/2" PLYWOODSHEATHING

VAPOR BARRIER

1' - 6"

3"

2 - 14 GA STUDS - TYP

BENT PL 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 3" x 9 1/4"BRACKETS @ 5'-0" OC MAX W/ 2 - #12SCREWS PER BRACKET - TYP

PLAN @ STUD WALLA

BENT PLATE BRACKETS - SEE PLANDETAIL

3/4" DIA x 1'-6" STEEL BAR RUNGS @1'-0" OC

L 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 3/8" x 2" W/ 1/2" Ø x4" EXP BOLTS

SECTIONC

X S

PA

CE

S @

1'-0

" O

CV

AR

IES

1' -

0".

8".

ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES:

A. ROOF PLAN NOTES APPLY TO ALL ROOF PLAN SHEETS.B. ALL INSULATION IS TAPERED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

TAPER IN INSULATION. SHADED AREAS INDICATE CRICKETSAROUND DRAINS. TAPERED INSULATION SHALL PROVIDE AMINIMUM OF 1/4-INCH PER FOOT OF SLOPE TO ROOF DRAINS,UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

C. ALL ROOF CURBS TO BE A MINIMUM OF 8" ABOVE ROOFINGLEVELS. PROVIDE TAPERED INSULATION ROOF SADDLES ATROOF CURBS TO PROVIDE APPROPRIATE DRAINAGE.

D. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR FRAMING AROUND ROOFPENETRATIONS.

E. COORDINATE THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF ROOF PENETRATIONSFOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. REFER TOMECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR PENETRATIONSNOT SHOWN ON THIS SHEET.

F. FLASH DRAINS, CURBS, VENTS AND STACKS PERMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS IF DETAIL NOT SHOWNON PLANS.

7

EXISTING GALV STANDING SEAM ROOF

WRAP MEMBRANE UNDER EXISTING ROOF

EXTENDED SS FLASHING

24" X 24" X 2" THICK SPASHBLOCK PLACE @ FULLLENGTH OF ROOF CHANGE

ROOF ASSEMBLY2"

4"

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTES

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

0:2

6 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

RO

OF

PLA

N A

ND

DE

TA

ILS

A4.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


ROOF PLAN

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

31 CONDENSING UNIT PIPING PENETRATION DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

51 CONDUIT PENETRATION DETAIL

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"A4.1

43 ROOF DRAIN / OVERFLOW

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

22 COMM/CABLE PENETRATION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

52 ROOF DRAIN DETAIL

SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"A4.1

21 ROOF HATCH SECTION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

54 PLAZA DECK DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

41 ROOF DRAIN DETAIL

KEYNOTE LEGEND

R1 EXISTING STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF; EVALUATE FOR ROOFLEAK LOCATIONS AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED.

R2 ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW; SEE MECHANICAL

R3 MECHANICAL UNIT; SEE MECHANICAL

R4 BALLASTED ROOF MOUNT GUARDRAIL; MANUFACTURER: PEAKFALL PROTECTION, MODEL: BRM-GR 4000 OR APPROVED EQUAL

R5 FABRIC AWNING BELOW

R6 ROOF HATCH W/ WALL MOUNTED ACCESS LADDER

R7 EXISTING WOOD STAIR

R8 24"X24"X2" CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

23 INTERIOR LADDER DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.1

12 DETAIL @ ROOF CHANGE

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

T.O. MASONRY126' - 8"

ROOF LEVEL124' - 5"

7 5/8"2"2 3/4"3 5/8"

1' - 4"

1/2" EXT PLYWOOD

EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING; EXTENDOVER TOP OF PARAPET TO 2" PAST THETOP OF THE FACE CMU VENEER

TAPERED INSULATION

VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVER CMUWALL AND LAP OVER AIR BARRIER 4" MIN

T&G DECKING

WOOD JOISTS; SEESTRUCTURAL

2" RIGID INSULATION

3/8"Ø x 6" LONG GALVANCHOR BOLTS @ 24" O.C.

(2) LAYERS OF CONT. 3/4"EXT GRADE PLYWOOD

PREFINISHED METAL COPINGAND ANCHOR CLIPS

8" CMU

FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER

4" CMU VENEER

1/2" PLYWOOD

HORIZ JOINT REINF @ 16" O.C.

HORIZ VENEER JOINT REINF @16" O.C.

CAVITY WALL INSULATION

6" 4 1/

2"

COVER BOARD

TOP COURSE SMOOTH FACE CMU CC-1

LEVEL 01100' - 0"

CMU VENEER

CAVITY DRAINAGEMATERAIL


FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIERMTL STD FRAMING; SEE

PLAN FOR WALL TYPE

GWB

2 1/2" PERIMETERINSULATION TOBOTTOM OFFOOTING

FLOOR FINISH AND WALLBASE AS SCHEDULED

GROUT SOLID

SS DRIP EDGE

HORIZ JOINT REINF@ 16" O.C. UNO

3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8"PLANSEE

CONCRETEFOUNDATION; SEESTRUCTURAL

CONCRETE SLAB ONGRADE; SEE STRUCTURAL

VAPOR BARRIER

ISOLATION JOINT

1' - 4"

AIR SPACE

EMBEDDEDFLASHING ANDWEEPS @ 24" O.C.

HORIZ VENEER JOINTREINF @ 16" O.C. UNO

WHERE MTL STUDS INTERFACEWITH CMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION

STRIP,TYP

TRANSITION STRIP

LEVEL 01100' - 0"

MTL STD FRAMING; SEEPLAN FOR WALL TYPE

GWB



VAPOR BARRIER

ISOLATION JOINT

EXISTING RUBBLEFOUNDATION WALL

2" RIGID INSULATION

CONCRETE FOUNDATION;SEE STRUCTURAL

2 1/2" PERIMETER INSULATIONTO BOTTOM OF FOOTING

DOUBLE WYTHE 8" CMU WALL

EXISTING MASONRY WALL

2" 1' - 3 5/8"

HORIZ. JOINT REIN @ 16" O.C.

WHERE METAL STUDS INTERFACE WITHCMU, PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP

LEVEL 02113' - 3 1/2"

GWB

METAL STUD FRAMING; SEE PLAN FOR WALL TYPE

TILE FLOORING AND WALL BASE AS SCHEDULED

GENIEMAT RST05 5MM SOUNDCONTROL UNDERLAYMENT; INSTALLPER MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS

1/2" PLYWOOD

T&G WOOD DECKING

CONT. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT PERIMETER

WOOD JOISTS;SEE STRUCTURAL

OWENS CORNING 2" MAT FACEDSOUND SELECTED BOARDFASTENED BETWEEN JOISTS.

WALL FURRING; SEE PLAN

7 5/8"2"2 3/4"3 5/8"

1' - 4"

8" CMU



4" CMU VENEER

HORIZ JOINT REINF @16" O.C. UNO


WHERE METAL STUDSINTERFACE WITH CMU,PROVIDE ISOLATION STRIP,TYP

LEVEL 02113' - 3 1/2"

7

T&G WOOD DECKING

1/2" PLYWOOD

GENIEMAT RST05 5MM SOUND CONTROLUNDERLAYMENT; INSTALL PERMANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS

TILE AS SCHEDULED

STEEL BEAM; SEE STRUCTURAL


EXISTING WOOD FLOOR STRUCTURE

1' - 3"

113' - 4 1/4"

LEVEL 01100' - 0"

STONE VENEER

CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL

2-1/2" RIGID INSULATION

AIR BARRIER

SHEATHING

MTL STD FRAMING

GWB

SLAB ON GRADE;SEE CIVIL

WOOD FLOOR FRAMING;SEE STRUCTURAL

1/2" PLYWOOD

ISOLATION JOINT

EXISTING WOODFRAMED FLOOR

EXISTINGRUBBLE/CONCRETEFOUNDATION WALL;FIELD VERIFY

LIMESTONE SILL

ALUM CLAD WOODWINDOW

FLOOR FINISH ASSCHEDULED

GROUT SOLID

SS FLASHING WRAPINTO WINDOW

SS DRIP EDGE

3 5/8"

1 1/4"

2 1/2"

5/8"

8"

5/8"

FLASHING AND WEEPS @ 24" O.C.

WOOD SILL; PAINT

1/2"

CC-1

LEVEL 01100' - 0"

CMU VENEER



FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIERMTL STD FRAMING

GWB

2 1/2" PERIMETERINSULATION TOBOTTOM OF FOOTING


GROUT SOLID

SS DRIP EDGE


3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8"PLANSEE



VAPOR BARRIER

ISOLATION JOINT

1' - 4"

AIR SPACE

EMBEDDEDFLASHING ANDWEEPS @ 24" O.C.

HORIZ VENEER JOINTREINF @ 16" O.C. UNO WHERE METAL STUDS

INTERFACE WITH CMU, PROVIDEISOLATION STRIP,TYP

TRANSITION STRIP

LEVEL 01100' - 0"

STONE VENEER



FLUID APPLIED AIRBARRIER

SOLID CMU

1-5/8" MTL STUDFURRING

GWB

SLAB ON GRADE;SEE CIVIL


ISOLATION JOINT


LIMESTONE SILL

ALUM CLADWOOD WINDOW

FLOOR FINISH ASSCHEDULED

GROUT SOLID

SS FLASHING WRAPINTO WINDOW

SS DRIP EDGE

3 5/8"

1 3/4"

2" 7 5/8" 2 1/4"

2 1/2" PEREMETERINSLUTION TOBOTTOM OF FOOTING

FLASHING AND WEEPS@ 24" O.C.

VAPOR BARRIER

WOOD SILL ANDTRIM; PAINT

1/2"

6"

CC-1

CMU VENEER




GROUT SOLID

SS DRIP EDGE


3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8"PLANSEE

1' - 4"

AIR SPACE

EMBEDDED FLASHINGAND WEEPS @ 24" O.C.


NEW BLOCKING AS REQ'D

NEW GALV SHEET METAL COPING

GALV COUNTERFLASHING

SEALANT


EXISTING STANDINGSEAM METAL ROOF

TRANSITION STRIP

BOND BEAM

COMPRESSIBLE SEAL 4" CMU VENEER

SEALANT AT PERIMETER

5/8" EXT GWB SOFFIT, PAINT

2-1/2" RIGID INSULATION


SHEATHING

3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING

8" CMU


4" CMU VENEER

EMBEDDED FLASHING ANDWEEPS @ 24" OC



STEEL LINTEL - SEE STRUCTURAL

STAINLESS STEEL DRIP EDGE

BOTTOM PLATE, SEE STR, PAINT TOMATCH WINDOW FRAME

EXT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT;PAINT

3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING

SHEATHING

2 1/2" RIGID INSULATION

SEALANT AT PERIMETER



1' - 4"

3 5/8" 2 3/4" 2" 7 5/8"

T.O. MASONRY126' - 8"

ROOF LEVEL124' - 5"

6

7 5/8"2"2 3/4"3 5/8"

1' - 4"

1/2" EXT PLYWOOD

EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING; EXTENDOVER TOP OF PARAPET TO 2" PAST THETOP OF THE FACE CMU VENEER

COVER BOARD

VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVER CMUWALL AND LAP OVER AIR BARRIER 4" MIN

T&G DECKING

WOOD JOISTS; SEESTRUCTURAL

2" RIGID INSULATION

3/8"Ø x 6" LONG GALVANCHOR BOLTS @ 24" O.C.

(2) LAYERS OF CONT. 3/4"EXT GRADE PLYWOOD

PREFINISHED METAL COPINGAND ANCHOR CLIPS

8" CMU


FACE BRICK

1/2" PLYWOOD

HORIZ JOINT REINF @ 16" O.C.


6" 4 1/

2"

TAPERED INSULATION

LEVEL 02113' - 3 1/2"

6

FACE OF INSULATION8"

PORCELAIN ROOFPAVER SYSTEM

FACE BRICK

CAVITY INSULATION



CMU

SS DRIP EDGE

EMBEDDED FLASHINGAND WEEPS 24" O.C.

TRANSISTION STRIP

COUNTERFLASHING; WRAPUNDER STEEL ANGLE

VAPOR BARRIER; WRAP OVERINSULATION AND TIE INTO AIRBARRIER

ROOFING MEMBRANE W/TERMINATION BAR ANDSEALANT


RIGID INSULATION

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

0:2

7 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

WA

LL S

EC

TIO

N D

ET

AIL

SA7.3

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

21 PARAPET DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

51 BASE DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

52 BASE DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

31 DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

24 NEW TO EXIST FLOOR

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3



54 BASE DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

32 DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

34 SOFFIT DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

33 SOFFIT DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

22 PARAPET DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A7.3

25 DETAIL

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

BACKER ROD ANDSEALANT - TYP BOTH SIDES

PRE-FORMEDCONTROL JOINT GASKET

STOP HORIZ JOINTREINF AT EACHSIDE OF CONTROLJOINTSASH BLOCK

3/8" JOINT - RAKEBACK 3/4" W/ BACKERROD AND SEALANT BOTHSIDES

BLDG FELTONE SIDE

GROUT FULL

CMU

NOTES:1. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR REINFORCING REQUIREMENTS.2. EITHER OPTION "A" OR OPTION "B" MAY BE USED AT

INTERIOR CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS.

OPTION A

OPTION B

A

B

CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS

TOP TRACK

CRIPPLE STUDS ABOVE HEADERTOP TRACK - SEE NOTE BELOW

HEADER

STIFFENER STUDS

BEARING STUD

BOTTOM TRACK

NOTE: ABOVE HEADER, PROVIDE 1/2"MIN CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN CRIPPLESTUDS AND STIFFENER STUDS BOTHSIDES OF ALL DOOR OPENINGS

TYP METAL STUD FRAMING AT DOOR OPENINGA

52BA10.1

TYP GWB CONTROL JOINT ABOVEB

GWB/METAL STUD WALL -SEE PLAN FOR WALL TYPE

DOOR FRAME BELOW

CONTROL JOINT

CRIPPLE STUDS @ 16" OC

STIFFENER STUDS - SEE STRUCTURAL

NOTE:AT DOUBLE LAYER GWB LOCATIONSMAINTAIN 1/2" CLEAR SPACE ATFIRST LAYER AND CONTROL JOINTAT SECOND LAYER

GROUT FULL

BLDG FELT ONE SIDE

3/8" JOINT - RAKE BACK 3/4" W/BACKER ROD AND SEALANT BOTHSIDES

MESH - SEE STRUCTURAL

GROUT FULL

CMU

6"

1' - 1"

AT GWB WALL

GWB/METAL STUD WALL - SEE PLANSFOR WALL TYPE

6"

10 1/2" RO

1' - 1"

2 1/

2"4"

RO

6 1/

2"

TO MAINTAIN A 1-HOUR RATING BEHINDFEC'S AT AN 8" CMU WALL, EITHERPROVIDE A 4" SOLID BLOCK OR AN 8"CUT CMU W/ 2" SOAPS AND ALL VOIDSGROUTED SOLID

NOTE:VERIFY ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONWITH CABINET MFR - TOP OF RO @4'-8" AFF

AT CMU WALL

6 1/

2"

2 1/

2"4"

RO

10 1/2" RO

GWB - SEE WALL TYPES ON PLANSFOR NUMBER OF LAYERS

METAL STUDS - SEE WALL TYPESON PLANS FOR SIZE AND GAUGE

SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS

CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANTAROUND PERIMETER OF ALLELECTRICAL DEVICES

SEAL ALL ELECTRICAL KNOCKOUTS

NOTE: NO BACK-TO-BACK DEVICES

BASE AS SCHEDULED

CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANTUNDER OUTER LAYER OF GWB ONEACH SIDE

CMU

CASING BEAD AND SEALANT - BOTHSIDES

METAL STUD WALL - SEE PLAN FORTYPE

7/8"

1/2" MAX.

MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

COMPRESSED TO FILL OPENING

TYPE X GWB (TYP)7/8"

1/2" MAX. SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION

GWB

CONTROL JOINT ASSEMBLY, BOTHSIDES

ACOUSTICAL SEALANT, BOTH SIDES

1/2" JOINT WIDTH1" GYPSUM LINER PANELS

SEALANT

MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

STEEL J-RUNNER

CONTROL JOINT

GWB

AKEG COOLER DOOR SILL

VE

RIF

Y2"

4"

2" 2"

2" 2"

SWEEP GASKET

MASONITE SPACERS BY FOODSERVICE EQUIP CONTR

TILE & MORTAR SETTING BED

14 GA SS THRESHOLD PLATESCREWED & SEALED TO FLOOR

INSULATED DOOR

KEG COOLER

INSULATED WALL PANEL BY FOODSERVICE CONTRACTOR

TILE & MORTAR SETTING BED

EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB

2X6 BREAKERS TREATED WOODCONT AROUND FREEZER FURNISHED& INSTALLED BY GEN CONTR

RECESSED COOLER FLOOR PANEL BYFOOD SERVICE CONTRACTOR

ISOLATION JOINT 1/2" RIGIDINSULATION

SERVICE EQUIP CONTRVERIFY WITH FOOD

LINE OFEXISTING WALL

EXISTING CONCRETE CEILING

INSULATED PANELS

2X6 SLEEPER UNDER 1/2" PLYWOOD.SHIM AS REQUIRED TO MEET FINISHEDFLOOR LEVEL OF KITCHEN

2"2"SERVICE EQUIP CONTRVERIFY WITH FOOD

KEG COOLER

EXISTING WOOD FLOOR FRAMING

3/4" PLYWOOD MIN - CONTRACTOROPTION: ADD PLYWOOD OR ADJUST

THICKNESS PLYWOOD THICKNESS ASREQUIRED TO MEET REQUIRED

FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION; SEE FINISHSCHEDULE FOR FLOOR FINISH

SE

RV

ICE

EQ

UIP

CO

NT

RV

ER

IFY

WIT

H F

OO

D

VERIFY

INSULATED FLOOR PLANEL

GROUT FILLER

NEW 2X WOOD FLOOR FRAMING

CC-1

CC-1

1 1/2"

1 1/

2"

7"

3"

3"

EXISTING BRICK WALL

3" X 7" X 1/4" STEEL PLATE

1/2" X 3" PLATE W/ 1" DIA. HOLE

1/2"

2-3/8" DIA. HILTI HY-70 ADHESIVETHREADED ANCHORSW/ 10" MIN EMBED

ø 1"

1"

PERIMETER SEALANT ATMETAL PANEL LOCATIONS

1/4" WIRE ROPE FESTOONLIGHTING SUPPORT

BOTTOM OF DECK OR FLOOR

16 GA RECEIVER CHANNEL CONT W/2 1/2" MIN LEGS

NO CONNECTION BETWEEN CHANNELAND TRACK

3/16" Ø x 1 1/4" SCREW ANCHORS @FLOORS, NO 8x18 SCREWS @ ROOF@ 2'-8" O.C. MAX

STABILIZE STUDS AT TOP W/ CONTCHANNEL AND BRIDGE CLIP AT EACHSTUD

INFILL BETWEEN JOIST W/ (2)2X MEMBERS TO CLOSE GAP

WHERE WALLS RUN PARALLEL WITH WOOD JOISTS WHERE WALLS RUN PERPENDICULAR WITH WOOD JOISTS

ATTACH 2X MEMBER TO JOISTRUNNING PARALLEL WITH WALL

WOOD JOISTWOOD JOIST

FASTEN GYPSUM BOARD 1" BELOWDEFLECTION TRACK

1/2"

RELIEF JOINT BELOW FLOORSTRUCTURE

WHERE WALLS RUN PARLLEL WITH WOODJOISTS AND FALLS BETWEEN JOISTS

WOOD JOIST

RELIEF JOINT BELOW FLOORSTRUCTURE

BOTTOM OF DECK OR FLOOR

16 GA RECEIVER CHANNEL CONT W/2 1/2" MIN LEGS

NO CONNECTION BETWEEN CHANNELAND TRACK

3/16" Ø x 1 1/4" SCREW ANCHORS @FLOORS, NO 8x18 SCREWS @ ROOF@ 2'-8" O.C. MAX

STABILIZE STUDS AT TOP W/ CONTCHANNEL AND BRIDGE CLIP AT EACHSTUD

FASTEN GYPSUM BOARD 1" BELOWDEFLECTION TRACK

FINISH CEILINGAS SCHEDULED

3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUD BRACING @32" O.C.

3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" GWB

SUSP APC6"

SEE RCP

RC

P

SE

E

3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUD BRACING @32" O.C.

3 5/8" x 20GA METAL STUDS @ 16"O.C.

5/8" GWB

SUSP APC

FINISH CEILINGAS SCHEDULED

RC

PS

EE

6"

SEE RCP

DOOR AND FRAMEWHERE OCCURS

FULL GROUT JOINT

THIN SET TILE

METAL EDGE STRIP

CARPET

ALIGN

21

ALIGN

CT ON BUILT UP THINSETMORTAR

FULL GROUT JOINT

PT (THIN SET)

METAL TRIM

SUBFLOOR

DOOR AND FRAME WHEREOCCURS

FULL GROUT JOINT

THIN SET TILE

METAL EDGE STRIP

ALIGN

1/4"

MA

X

DOOR AND FRAMEWHERE OCCURS

FULL GROUT JOINT

THIN SET MORTAR

CONCRETESUBFLOOR

EXISTING JOISTS16" OC

EXISTING PLYWOODUNDERLAYMENT

1/2" CEMENTITIOUSSELF-LEVELING

UNDERLAYMENT

THI SET MORTAR

CONTROL JOINT

PT

PT

METAL LATH

6

F

1' -

6"

1' - 3"

TOOTH IN SALVAGED BRICK TOEXISTING MASONRY WALL

STRUCTURAL COLUMN; SEESTRUCTURAL


GWB ON METAL STUD FRAMING

BRICK TIES

CMU

CC-1

CONTROL JOINT


CMU

2" RIDID INSULATION

CMU VENEER

BACKER ROD AND SEALANT

BASF WABO WEATHERSEALL II OR EQUAL

2"

CC-1

TOILET SIGNA B

TYPE A (SHOWN) - WOMENTYPE B - MEN

BRAILLE - GRADE II, 24 POINTCOLOR: BLACK

ROOM TEXT, 1" HIGHFONT: ARIAL, TYPCOLOR: BLACK, TYP

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OFACCESSIBILITY

SYMBOL COLOR: BLACK

RECLAIMED WOOD, STAINED ST-1

4"4"

8"

8"

CL

1/2"

5"

8"

8"

3" GRAPHICCOLOR: BLACK

ALUMINUM

STAIR SIGNH

WOMEN STAIRSBRAILLE - GRADE II, 24 POINTCOLOR: BLACK

TEXT, 1" HIGHFONT: ARIAL, TYPCOLOR: BLACK, TYP

NOTICE

OCCUPANCY

###

FOR YOUR SAFETY

IS LIMITED TO

PERSONSBY ORDER OF

THE CODE OFFICIAL

Keep Posted Under Penalty Of Law

2' -

0"

3/4"3/

4"3/4"3/

4"1/

2" 3/4" 3/

4"

2"1"

1 1/

4"2"

1 1/

4"1"

2"3/

4" 2"

3/4" 3/

4" 3/4"

2"1

1/2"

1 1/2"1 1/2"

1' - 6"

FONT: HELVETICA MEDIUM, TYPCOLOR: BLACK

RECLAIMED WOOD, STAINED ST-1

OCCUPANT LOAD PER IBCOCCUPANT LOADREQUIREMNETS

NOTE: SIGN REQUIRED AT ANYSPACE WHERE REQUIRED BYAUTHORITY HAVINGJURISDICTION

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

9:3

5 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_A

R_2016_rh

auptm

anV

CN

NG

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

GE

NE

RA

L D

ET

AIL

SA10.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

44 TYP CMU CONTROL JOINT (CJ)

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

52 GWB CONTROL JOINTS @ DOOR FRAMES

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

42 TYP CMU INTERSECTIONSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

46 FEC DETAILSSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

45 SOUND WALL DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

43 TYPICAL WALL INTERSECTION

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A10.1

55 CONTROL JOINT - 1HR WALLSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A10.1

56 CONTROL JOINT - SOUND WALLSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A10.1

54 CONTROL JOINT - SHAFT WALL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

35 WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER DETAILSSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

34 FESTOON LIGHTING ANCHORSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

31 TOP OF WALL DETAILS

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

15 GWB BULKHEADSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

16 GWB BULKHEADSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A10.1

11 TRANSITION CARPET TO PORCELAIN TILESCALE: 6" = 1'-0"A10.1

12 TRANSITION - CERAMIC TILE TO PORCELAIN TILESCALE: 12" = 1'-0"A10.1

13 TRANSITION - CONCRETE TO PORCELAIN TILESCALE: 12" = 1'-0"A10.1

14 TRANSITION - CONCRETE TO WOOD SUBFLOOR

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

41 BRICK CORNER DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

51 NEW TO EXISTING BUILDING JOINT

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A10.1

21 TYPICAL PANEL SIGNSSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A10.1

23 OCCUPANT LOAD SIGN

CC-1

CC

-103

/30/

18A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

UP

VD

VD

S

S

UP

UP

UP

S CO2

CO

2S

S

SCO2

CO

2S

S

TT

S CO2

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD

VD VD VD

VD VD VD

VD VD VD

VD VD VD

SS

FS

FS

S

S

VD

VD

VD

SS

S

S

STORAGE

002

STAIR

0S4STAIR

0S1

STORAGE

001

ATU-001 ATU-002

8" SA UP

6"ø SA UP

8"x12" LTD UP

8"x8" LTD UP

R-18" x 6"

175 CFM

R-18" x 6"

175 CFM

R-18" x 6"

135 CFM

8"x8

" S

A

8"x8" SA

12"x

8" S

A

8"x14" OPENINGIN TOP OF DUCT

8"ø

SA

12"x

8" S

A

2

3

7

A.5 B

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102

869 SF

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

LOUNGE

105

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KE

G C

OO

LER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CO

RR

IDO

R

108

A/V

111

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

STAIR

1S3

BAR

119

STORAGE

104

STAIR

1S4

STAIR

1S1

CORRIDOR

110

G-38" x 8"

150 CFM

G-38" x 8"

150 CFM

8"ø EA

8"x8" EA UP

8"ø EA MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

EF-3

EF-2

6"ø EA6"ø EA

HOODED WALL CAP HOODED WALL CAP

AT

U-1

04

ATU-103

VESTIBULE

100

18"/12" SA

18"/12" SA

AT

U-1

07A

TU

-108

ATU-101

ATU-105

ATU-102

ATU-106

10"ø

SA

8"ø

SA

24"/12" SA

14"ø

SA

8" SA DN

6"ø SA DN

6"ø

SA

10"ø SA

10"x10" SA

22"x20" SA UP

8"x8

" E

A

36"/18" RA

3/4" CD UP

14"ø SA

30"/18" RA

18"x12" SA

18"/12" SA

18"/12" SA

1

M3.1

16"/10" SA

36"x18" RA UP36"x18" RA

32"x

14"

SA

16"/10" SA

28"x

12"

SA

18"/12" SA

28"x

12"

SA

16"x12" SA

OFFSET UP

OFFSET UNDER BEAM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

205 CFM

R-110" x 6"

205 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

205 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

R-110" x 6"

205 CFM

R-110" x 6"

210 CFM

CUH-101

CUH-102

TOCUH-102

TO SSIU-2

YOUNG REGULATOR

6" ø100 CFM

D-4

6" ø100 CFM

D-4

G-38" x 8"

G-38" x 8"TYP 2 8"x8" LTD8"x8" LTD

12"ø SA

16"x14" SA

DN

8"ø

SA

6"ø SA

6"ø

SA

6"ø SA

8"x8" SA

R-18" x 6"

150 CFMTYP 5

10"ø

SA

14"ø

SA

R-18" x 6"

150 CFMTYP 2

R-18" x 6"

150 CFMTYP 2

R-18" x 6"

200 CFMTYP 2

R-18" x 6"

150 CFMTYP 2

R-18" x 6"

150 CFMTYP 2

8" ø190 CFM

D-1

TYP 28"ø SA

8"ø

SA

12"x

10"

SA

6"ø

SA

8"x6" LTD

60 CFM

G-424" x 24"

TYP 4G-4 SURFACE MOUNTED TOBOTTOM OF DUCT (TYPICAL)

G-424" x 24"

TYP 2

G-4 SURFACE MOUNTED TOBOTTOM OF DUCT (TYPICAL)

12"x8" LTD DN

10"ø SA

10"ø SA

3/4" CD UP


20"/14" LTD

8"X12" OPENING INTOP OF DUCT

8"x8" LTD DN

G-124" x 12"

G-212" x 6"

8"x8" LTD

24"x14" LTD

G-224" x 14"

MOUNT BOTTOM OFGRILLE AT 9'-2" AFF

3/4" CD DN TO MS

8" ø130 CFM

D-1

8" ø140 CFM

D-1

8"x6" LTD

12"x

12"

LTD

G-212" x 12"

3/4" CD DN TO MS

3/4" CDCO

G-124" x 12"

50 C

FM

G-124" x 12"

G-224" x 12"

200CFM

8"x6

" LT

D

36"x12" SA

8"x8" SA

6" ø45 CFM

D-4

6" ø45 CFM

D-4

12"x8" SA

12"x6" LTD

REGISTER TO DISCHARGEPARALLEL TO FLOOR (TYPICALUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

R-18" x 6"

150 CFM

W/ VD ANGLED45° DN.TOWARDS GLASS

CC-1

R-110" x 6"

105 CFMTYP 2

W/ VD ANGLED 45°DN. TOWARDS GLASS

FTR-102FTR-101

CC-1


CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

TEMP CONTROL PANEL

CC-1

OFFICE

118

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTESLEGEND NOTES ARE COMMON TO ALLSOME NOTES MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS SHEET

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

2:3

4 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

HV

AC

PLA

N, B

AS

EM

EN

T &

MA

IN L

EV

ELS

M1.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


HVAC PLAN, BASEMENT LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

HVAC PLAN, MAIN LEVEL

KEYNOTE LEGEND - HVACKEY VALUE KEYNOTE TEXT

CC

-103

/30/

2018

ATTACHMENT NO. M1.1-1TO CC-1DATE: 03/30/2018

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

ST

S

CO2

CO

2

CO2

S CO2

S

S

S

S

VD

VD

VD

S

VD VD VD

VDVDVD

VD VD VD

VDVDVD

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

SSOU-18

M4.1

9

M4.1RS/RL DN

GUARDRAILSEE ARCH.

EF-110'-0" MIN

10'-0

" M

IN

RTU-2

RTU-1

1

M3.1

GUARDRAILSEE ARCH.

GUARDRAILSEE ARCH.

10

M4.1

10

M4.1SSOU-2

RS/RL DN

9

M4.1

8

M4.1

10'-0

" M

IN

10'-0" MIN

2

3

7

A.5 B

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

OUTDOORSEATING

213GALLERY

202

CO

RR

IDO

R

205

STAIR

2S1

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

CONFERENCEROOM

207

STORAGE

208

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

RECEPTIONHALL

206

STAIR

2S3

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

BAR

201

SSIU-18"x8" EA DN

G-38" x 8"

150 CFM

12"x

10"

EA

G-524" x 12"150 CFM

ELEVATORLOBBY

212

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

14"/10" SA

20"/

12"

SA

16"/10" SA

ATU-203

ATU-204

AT

U-2

05

20"/12" SA

AT

U-2

02

AT

U-2

018"

ø E

A

8"ø EA

12"ø EA UP TO EF-1

M

3/4" CD DN

RS/RLUP

28"x16" SA22"x20" SA DN

1

M3.1

36"x18" RA DN36"x18" RA

36"x18" RA UP TO RTU-1

28"x16" SA UP TO RTU-1

26"x14" SA

20"/12" SA

34"/14" RA

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

R-112" x 6"

200 CFM

12"x12" SA

12"x

12"

SA

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

R-112" x 6"

250 CFM

34"x16" RA UP TO RTU-2

26"x14" SA UP TO RTU-2

34"/14" RA

8" ø290 CFM

D-1

10"x8" SA

10"x

8" S

A

6"ø

SA

8"ø SA

R-16" x 6"

90 CFM

16"x8" LTD

6"ø SA

20"/12" SA

G-216" x 8"

G-124" x 12"

8"x6" LTD

G-28" x 6"

6"ø

SA

10"x

8" S

A

R-16" x 6"

110 CFM

6"ø

SA

8"x6" LTD

G-28" x 6"

22"x

10"

SA

14"ø

SA

20"x

14"

LTD

G-124" x 24"

8"x8" LTD8"x8" LTD

G-38" x 8"

G-524" x 12"

G-124" x 12"

TYP 2

SSIU-2

RS/RL UP 3/4" CD DN

10"/8" SA 10"x8" SA

6" ø100 CFM

D-2

6" ø100 CFM

D-4

G-418" x 12"

TYP 7

CO

8" ø210 CFM

D-2

12"x6" LTD

G-212" x 6"

YOUNG REGULATOR

8" ø185 CFM

D-5

8" ø185 CFM

D-5

8" ø200 CFM

D-5

8" ø200 CFM

D-5

8" ø220 CFM

D-68" ø

220 CFM

D-6MOUNT BOTTOM OF PLENUMBOX AT 10'-3" (TYP 2)

G-124" x 12"

8" ø150 CFM

D-5

TYP 2

G-324" x 24"

TYP 2

12"ø EA DOUBLEWALL SPIRAL

REGISTER TO DISCHARGEPARALLEL TO FLOOR (TYPICALUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

FT

R-2

01F

TR

-202 CC-1

CC-1

MECHANICAL NOTES

(MECHANICAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL MECHANICAL DRAWINGS)

A. TEXT.

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTES

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

2:4

1 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

HV

AC

PLA

N, U

PP

ER

& R

OO

F L

EV

ELS

M1.2

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

KEYNOTE LEGEND - HVACKEY VALUE KEYNOTE TEXT


HVAC PLAN, ROOF LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

HVAC PLAN, UPPER LEVEL

CC

-103

/30/

2018


Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

2:5

3 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L S

CH

ED

ULE

SM

5.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

5. PRESSURE DROP IS BASED ON MAXIMUM CFM.

4. ELECTRIC HEATING CAPACITY IS BASED ON NOTED HEATING CFM.

3. ELECTRIC HEAT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A MODULATING SCR HEATER.

2. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 1/2-INCH THICK FIBER FREE SOUND INSULATION.

1. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH NON FUSED DISCONNECT.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

ATU-205 RTU-2 209-MECH/ELEC & 210-CATERING STAGING 320 320 0.75 0.4 0.08 15 20 3.0 208 3 10.4 15.0 85.7 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-204 RTU-2 207-CONFERENCE ROOM & 208-STORAGE 375 375 0.75 0.4 0.11 17 23 3.5 208 3 12.1 15.0 85.6 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-203 RTU-2 206-RECEPTION HALL (SOUTH) 1,500 820 0.75 0.4 0.08 15 19 7.5 208 3 26.0 30.0 85 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-202 RTU-2 206-RECEPTION HALL (NORTH) & 212-ELEVATOR LOBBY 1,500 820 0.75 0.4 0.08 15 19 7.5 208 3 26.0 30.0 85 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-201 RTU-2 201-BAR, 202-GALLERY, 2S3 STAIR 1,410 1,100 0.75 0.4 0.07 14 18 10.5 208 3 36.4 40.0 86.3 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-108 RTU-1 123-PRIVATE TASTING 410 410 1 0.4 0.02 15 25 4.0 208 3 13.9 15.0 87 TITUS DESV 08 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-107 RTU-1 120-FOOD PREP & 118-MECH 440 420 1 0.4 0.02 17 25 4.0 208 3 13.9 15.0 86.2 TITUS DESV 08 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-106 RTU-1 116-CATERING STAGING, 117-STORAGE 220 220 1 0.4 0.04 13 22 2.0 120 1 20.8 25.0 84.8 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-105 RTU-1 115-CONFERENCE ROOM, 114-MECH/ELEC 200 200 1 0.4 0.03 11 20 2.0 120 1 20.8 25.0 87.8 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-104 RTU-1 109-RECEPTION HALL (SOUTH), 110-CORRIDOR 1,250 570 1 0.4 0.06 14 18 5.5 208 3 19.1 20.0 86.6 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-103 RTU-1 109-RECEPTION HALL (NORTH) 1,250 570 1 0.4 0.06 14 18 5.5 208 3 19.1 20.0 86.6 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-102 RTU-1 105-LOUNGE, 1S3 STAIR 950 760 1 0.4 0.07 17 23 7.0 208 3 24.3 25.0 85.2 TITUS DESV 12 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-101 RTU-1 101-RETAIL, 102-TASTING ROOM, 119-BAR 1,720 1,075 1 0.4 0.11 17 20 10.0 208 3 34.7 35.0 85.5 TITUS DESV 14 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-002 RTU-1 002-STORAGE 135 135 1 0.4 0.01 - 15 1.5 120 1 15.6 20.0 91.4 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

ATU-001 RTU-1 001-STORAGE 350 350 1 0.4 0.09 18 23 3.5 208 3 12.1 15.0 87.8 TITUS DESV 06 1,2,3,4,5

(ATU-X) UNIT SERVED (IN WG) (IN WG) (IN WG) (NC) (NC) (°F) (DIA) NOTES

MARK FROM AREA MAX MIN MAX DOWN Pd RADIATED DISCHARGE kW V PH MCA MOP LAT MODEL INLET MECH

PRIMARY CFM STATIC PRESSURE ARI NOISE RATING BASIS OF DESIGN

TERMINAL BOX SCHEDULE - ELECTRIC REHEAT

2. ASME CODE COMPLIANT PRESSURE VESSEL.

1. TANK SHALL COMPLY WITH LOW LEAD PLUMBING LAW.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

ET-1 DWH-1 40-140 100 150 80 6.4 3.2 17 AMTROL ST-12C 1,2

(ET-X) (°F) (GAL) (PSI) (PSI) (GAL) (MIN) (GAL) (MIN) (LBS) NOTES

MARK SERVES TEMP RANGE VOLUME PRESSURE PRESSURE VOLUME VOLUME WEIGHT BASIS OF DESIGN MECH

OPERATING SYSTEM MAX. ALLOWABLE LINE TANK ACCEPTANCE

EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE

7. PROVIDE WITH HOODED WALL CAP (GREENHECK WC-6).

6. INTERLOCK FAN WITH LIGHT SWITCH.

5. PROVIDE WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER.

4. FAN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SPEED CONTROLLER FACTORY MOUNTED TO THE FAN.

3. FAN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH.

2. FAN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 12-INCH ROOF CURB.

1. FAN SHALL HAVE AN ECM MOTOR WITH VARI-GREEN CONTROL DIAL ON MOTOR.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

EF-3 113-WOMEN'S RR CENT. 70 0.4 739 DIRECT 80 W 120 1 60 1.2 GREENHECK SP-B110 3,4,5,6,7

EF-2 112-MEN'S RR CENT. 70 0.4 739 DIRECT 80 W 120 1 60 1.2 GREENHECK SP-B110 3,4,5,6,7

EF-1 ROOF CENT. 600 0.5 1559 DIRECT 1/6 120 1 60 8.1 GREENHECK CUE-095-VG 1,2,3

MARK LOCATION TYPE CFM (IN WG) RPM TYPE [WATTS] V PH HZ SONES BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES

FAN ESP FAN DRIVE HP MAX MECH

FAN DATA ELECTRICAL DATA

FAN SCHEDULE

11. COIL EAT ACCOUNTS FOR SOME RETURN AIR MIXED WITH WHEEL LAT (OUTSIDE AIR). DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SA CFM AND OA CFM IS RA CFM.

10. PROVIDE WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WITH AN SCCR RATING OF 20KA.

9. UNIT WEIGHT INCLUDES WEIGHT OF ROOF CURB.

8. POWERED EXHAUST FAN SPEED VARIED TO MAINATAIN BUILDING PRESSURE.

7. PROVIDE WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WITH AN SCCR RATING OF 24KA.

6. PROVIDE UNIT WITH DOUBLE WALL CONSTRUCTION.

5. PROVIDE UNIT WITH STAINLESS STEEL HEAT EXCHANGER.

4. PROVIDE WITH THROUGH THE BASE GAS PIPING AND ELECTRICAL.

3. LEAD COMPRESSOR IS A DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR WITH MODULATOION FROM 20%-100% OF CAPACITY.

2. PROVIDE WITH COMPARATIVE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZER AND POWER EXHAUST.

1. PROVIDE OUTDOOR AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION, UNIT CONTROLLER TO MAINTAIN MINIMUM OUTDOOR AIRFLOW INDEPENDENT OF SUPPLY FAN SPEED.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

RTU-2 ROOF 2ND FLR 2,151 1,750 -10.0 -10.0 70.0 52.0 45.6 37.7 95.0 78.0 75.0 63.0 81.1 68.2 59.1 83.9 133.7 0 2.3 77.7 65.4 52.7 52.1 182.1 126.6 95 R-410A 2 2 2 - 9 TONS 11.5 10 TO 1 250 200 4,600 1,850 1.3 1,644 (2) 4 HP 1,750 0.75 1,180 (1) 4 HP 208 3 60 98.8 105.7 125 67 x 74 x 208 4,975 TRANE ASHP HORIZON OAGE210 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11

RTU-1 ROOF 1ST FLR 3,560 3,260 -10.0 -10.0 70.0 52.0 52.3 41.6 95.0 78.0 75.0 63.0 79.0 66.8 60.3 79.7 142.5 0 2.2 77.2 65.2 55.6 54.9 187.9 142.9 95 R-410A 2 2 2 - 9 TONS 12.5 10 TO 1 300 240 6,000 2,215 1.5 1,914 (2) 4 HP 3,260 0.75 1,558 (1) 4 HP 208 3 60 100.6 107.5 125 67 x 74 x 208 5,130 TRANE ASHP HORIZON OAGE210 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,11

(CFM) (CFM) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) (MBH) °F (°F DB) (°F WB) (°F DB) (°F WB) MBH MBH °F NO. COMP. QT-SIZE (MBH) (MBH) (IN WG) RPM HP (IN WG) RPM HP (INCHES) (LBS) NOTES

MARK LOCATION SERVES OA EA OA EAT RA EAT LAT OA EAT RA EAT LAT EAT LAT CAP AMB TEMP COP EAT LAT TOTAL CAP SENS CAP AMB TEMP REFR FAN DATA OF COMP EER STAGES INPUT OUTPUT CFM CFM ESP FAN & CFM ESP FAN & V PH Hz FLA MCA MOP H x W x L WEIGHT MECH

WINTER HEAT RECOVERY SUMMER HEAT RECOVERY HEATING MODE COOLING MODE COND. NO. CAPACITY MIN QTY QTY DIMENSIONS

ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL SECTION AIR-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP PERFORMANCE GAS HEAT SUPPLY FAN(S) EXHAUST FANELECTRICAL DATA

BASIS OF DESIGN

PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP WITH INTEGRAL ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT SCHEDULE

4. PUMP AND AQUASTAT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE (TMV-1).

3. PUMP SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 3/4" SWEAT CONNECTIONS.

2. PUMP SHALL BE BRONZE BODY CONSTRUCTION COMPLYING WITH LEAD-FREE REQUIREMENT.

1. PUMP SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY AQUASTAT. CYCLE PUMP TO MAINTAIN A RECIRCULATING DHW TEMPERATURE OF 110 DEG F (ADJ.) AT PUMP.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

P-1 110° DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC INLINE 3 8.5 - - - 1/40 115 1 60 3250 TACO 006-B4 1,2,3,4

(FT WG) (%) (WATTS)

HEAD EFF HPV PH HZ RPM

NOTESMARK SERVES PUMP TYPE GPM

PUMP MIN MOTOR DATA

BASIS OF DESIGN

MECH

PUMP SCHEDULE

3. UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH WIRED THERMOSTAT / CONTROLLER.

2. INDOOR UNIT IS POWERED FROM OUTDOOR UNIT.

1. MOUNTING HEIGHT SHOWN IS A MINIMUM, TO FACILITATE CONDENSATE DRAINAGE. FINAL HEIGHT MAY BE HIGHER TO ACCOMMODATE CLEARANCES OR FACILITATE ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

SSIU-2 STAIR - 1S2 SSOU-2 12.4 9.9 73 / 61 11.9 68 / 0 380 - - - 208 1 3.15 TRANE 4MXW3809A10N 9'-6" 3/4" 1,2,3

SSIU-1 ELEV EQUIP-211 SSOU-1 12.4 9.9 73 / 61 11.9 68 / 0 380 - - - 208 1 3.15 TRANE 4MXW3809A10N 9'-6" 3/4" 1,2,3

(MBH) (MBH) (°F) (MBH) (°F) (IN WG) (BOTTOM OF UNIT) (INCHES)

CAP CAP DB / WB CAP DB / AMB CFM ESP DRAIN SIZE NOTES

TOT SENS EAT EAT

V PH MOP

CONDENSATE MECHMARK LOCATION

OUTDOORUNIT

COOLING DATA HEATING DATA FAN DATA

BASIS OF DESIGNMOUNTING HEIGHT

SPLIT SYSTEM INDOOR UNIT

B. WIND BAFFLE TO IMPROVE UNIT OPERATION DURING HIGH WINDS AND FOR LOW AMBIENT CONDITIONS.

A. LOW AMBIENT KIT FOR OPERATION DOWN TO 0 DEG. F.

3. PROVIDE WITH THE FOLLOWING:

POWER WIRING BETWEEN OUTDOOR AND INDOOR UNITS. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.

2. MCA IS FOR BOTH INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNITS (SYSTEM). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POWER TO OUTDOOR UNIT, AND PROVIDE

1. REFRIGERANT PIPE QUANTITIES AND SIZE TO BE PER MANUFACTURER'S PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS AND SPECIFICATION SECTION 238126.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

SSOU-2 SSIU-2 12.4 / 11.9 1 INVER R-410A 1 1 105 / 0 208 1 9 15 TRANE 4TXK3809A10N 1,2,3

SSOU-1 SSIU-1 12.4 / 11.9 1 INVER R-410A 1 1 105 / 0 208 1 9 15 TRANE 4TXK3809A10N 1,2,3

COOL/HEAT (EACH) TYPE NO CIRC (°F)

(MBH) STEPS REFRIG FAN NO COOL / HEAT

CAPACITY

NO

AMB TEMP

V PH MCA MOPMARK SERVES

TOTAL COMPRESSOR DATA CONDENSER DATA ELECTRICAL DATA

BASIS OF DESIGN MECH

SPLIT SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT

4. REFER TO DETAIL 1/M4.1 FOR CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS.

3. LINEAR DIFFUSER SHALL HAVE A SINGLE 1-INCH SLOT AND INCLUDE FBPI-15 INSULATED PLENUM AND BOARDER TYPE 66.

2. LINEAR DIFFUSER SHALL HAVE A SINGLE 1.5-INCH SLOT AND INCLUDE FBPI-15 INSULATED PLENUM AND BOARDER TYPE 66.

1. SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION, NECK SIZE AND CFM.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

G-5 0.1 20 ALUMINUM N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS 8R 1

G-4 0.1 20 STEEL N LAY-IN ALUMINUM TITUS 8R 1

G-3 0.05 20 ALUMINUM N SURFACE WHITE TITUS 8R 1

G-2 0.05 20 STEEL N SURFACE WHITE TITUS 350 RL 1

G-1 0.05 20 STEEL N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS 8R 1

R-1 0.1 20 STEEL N SURFACE ALUMINUM TITUS 301RS 1

D-6 0.1 25 STEEL N SURFACE WHITE TITUS FL-10-1-66-JT 1,3,4

D-5 0.1 25 STEEL N SURFACE WHITE TITUS FL-15-1-66-HT 1,2,4

D-4 0.1 25 ALUMINUM N SURFACE WHITE TITUS OMNI 12x12 1,4

D-3 0.1 25 STEEL N SURFACE WHITE TITUS OMNI 24x24 1,4

D-2 0.1 25 ALUMINUM N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS OMNI-AA 24x24 1,4

D-1 0.1 25 STEEL N LAY-IN WHITE TITUS OMNI 24x24 1,4

(IN WG) (DECIBELS) (Y/N)

MARK STATIC PD NC MATERIAL DAMPER TYPE FINISH BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES

MAX MAX FRAME MECH

DIFFUSER, REGISTER & GRILLE SCHEDULE

3. PROVIDE ONE PVB FOR EACH COLD AND HOT WATER HOSE BIBB.

2. PROVIDE WYE STRAINER.

1. MOUNTING HEIGHT IS A MINIMUM OF 12-INCHES TO THE BOTTOM OF THE UNIT TO A MAXIMUM OF 60-INCHES TO THE TOP OF THE TEST PORTS.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

PVB-1 AS SHOWN ON DWGS CLEANING CHEMICAL MIXING 5 5 1/2" 42" WATTS LF800M4QT 3

DCBP-2 STORAGE 002 WATER SERVICE 87 5.5 3" ---- WATTS LF007-NRS 1,2

DCBP-1 STORAGE 002 WATER SERVICE 87 5.5 3" ---- WATTS LF007-NRS 1,2

(GPM) (PSI) (INCHES) (AFF) NOTES

MARK LOCATION APPLICATION CAPACITY DROP SIZE HEIGHT BASIS OF DESIGN MECH

PRESSURE MOUNTING

BACKFLOW PREVENTER SCHEDULE

2. SERVED FROM 2 PSI SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2 PSI TO INCHES REGULATOR.

1. SET DISCHARGE OF MAIN GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR AT BUILDING ENTRANCE AT 2 PSIG.

NOTES:

TOTAL CONNECTED GAS LOAD 1,470 1

GAS FIRE PITS (FUTURE-NIC) 8 90 720 - 1/2 -

ROOFTOP UNIT (RTU-2) 1 250 250 7-14 1-1/4 2

ROOFTOP UNIT (RTU-1) 1 300 300 7-14 1-1/4 2

DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (DWH-1) 1 199.9 199.9 3.5-14 3/4 2

(MBH) EA (MBH) TOT. (IN.WG.) SIZE (IN)

MARK QUANTITY INPUT INPUT PRESS. CONN. NOTES

GAS METER - GLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM

PHONE: 402-972-4125

ENGINEER: TODD J McDEVITT

FIRM: DLR GROUP, INC., OMAHA, NE

PROJECT #: 10-17138-00

PROJECT: GLACIAL TILL WINE TASTING ROOM

1. FIXTURE FURNISHED WITH 1/8" DRAIN HOLE AT BASE OF UNIT. PROVIDE 1/2" COPPER DRAIN PIPE ROUTED TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN, FLOOR SINK, OR MOP SINK.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

WH-1 WALL HYDRANT 3/4" - - - 18-INCHES ABOVE FINISH GRADE -

WC-2 WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNTED, FLUSH VALVE, ADA COMPLIANT 1" - 4" 2" 16 1/2-INCHES TO RIM; 17 3/4-INCHES TO TOP OF SEAT -

WC-1 WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNTED, FLUSH VALVE 1" - 4" 2" 15-INCHES TO RIM; 16 1/4-INCHES TO TOP OF SEAT -

UR-2 URINAL, WALL MOUNTED, FLUSH VALVE, ADA COMPLIANT 1" - 2" 1-1/2" 17-INCHES TO RIM -

UR-1 URINAL, WALL MOUNTED, FLUSH VALVE 1" - 2" 1-1/2" 24-INCHES TO RIM -

RFH-1 ROOF HYDRANT 1" - 1/2" - ROOF MOUNTED 1

MS-1 MOP SINK 1/2" 1/2" 3" SEE PLANS FLOOR MOUNTED -

L-1 LAVATORY, ADA COMPLIANT 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" UNDER COUNTER MOUNTING -

MARK FIXTURE CW HW WASTE VENT REMARKS NOTES

FIXTURE CONNECTIONS MECH

PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE

2. THE SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE 2.0 FT³ OF EXCHANGE RESIN PER VESSEL AND A TOTAL OF 4.0 FT³ OF RESIN FOR THE SYSTEM.

1. BACKWASH FLOW RATE IS 3.5 GPM WITH A MINIMUM 1-1/2" DRAIN PIPE SIZE AND A 2-INCH INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTION.

WATER SOFTENER SCHEDULE NOTES:

WS-1 MECH/ELEC-114 69 25 51 15 17 1.66 14" x 47", QTY = 2 24" x 40", QTY =1 120 1 60 CULLIGAN CTM 60-DUPLEX PROGRESSIVE FLOW AQUA SENSOR 1,2

(GPM) (PSI) (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) (PSI) (DIA. X H.) (DIA. X H.)

FLOW RATE PRESS. DROP FLOW RATE PRESS. DROP FLOW RATE PRESS. DROP SIZE SIZE NOTES

PEAK CONTINUOUS DESIGN TANK TANK

V PH HZ

MECHMARK LOCATION

SERVICE FLOW RATES SOFTENER BRINE ELECTRICAL...

BASIS OF DESIGN

WATER SOFTENER

14-INCHES "ON", 5-INCHES "OFF", HIGH WATER ALARM FLOAT SWITCH WITH 90 dB (MIN) AUDIBLE ALARM, AND PUMP ALTERNATOR.

5. PROVIDE 36-INCH DIAMETER BY 60-INCH DEEP CAST IRON SUMP BASIN AND GAS TIGHT LID WITH 1-1/2-INCH DISCHARGE AND VENT CONNECTIONS, 20 FOOT CORD LENGTH, TETHERED MECHANICAL SWITCH TYPE FLOATS,

4. 20 FOOT CORD LENGTH, TETHERED MECHANICAL SWITCH TYPE FLOATS, 14-INCHES "ON", 5-INCHES "OFF".

E. WEIL PUMPS

D. MYERS, PENTAIR WATER

C. LIBERTY PUMPS.

B. LITTLE GIANT, FRANKLIN ELECTRIC.

A. BELL & GOSSETT

THE SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS LISTED HERE. THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS SHALL BE ADDED TO THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE PURPOSES OF BIDDING AS INDICATED BELOW:

3. THIS APPROVAL IS A GENERAL APPROVAL OF THE MANUFACTURER ONLY. FINAL APPROVAL OF THE PRODUCT IS CONTINGENT UPON THE SUBMITTAL OF THE PRODUCT DATA AND/OR SHOP DRAWINGS, WHICH SHALL MEET

2. PUMP SHALL HAVE 2-INCH DISCHARGE, CHECK VALVE AND 25-FOOT ELECTRICAL CORD WITH STANDARD GROUNDED PLUG.

1. PROVIDE WITH SINGLE LEVEL PIGGYBACK VARIABLE LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH, HARD WIRING THE PUMP LEAD WIRES TO THE FLOAT SWITCH LEADS. NO OTHER EXTERNAL CONTROLS REQUIRED.

MECHANICAL NOTES (NO SPEC WAS WRITTEN FOR THESE PUMPS. SUBMIT UNDER SPECTION 221429):

SP-3 002-STORAGE 002-STORAGE DUPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 20 28 - 2/5 115 1 60 1550 ---- ---- MYERS MODEL ME40120T 1,2,3,5

SP-2 001-STORAGE 001-STORAGE SIMPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 20 28 - 2/5 115 1 60 1550 ---- ---- MYERS MODEL ME40120T 1,2,3,4

SP-1 ELEVATOR PIT ELEVATOR 1 SIMPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 50 32 - 1/2 115 1 60 3450 ---- ---- ZOELLER MODEL N6292 1,2,3

(SP-X) (EACH PUMP) (FT WG) (%) (IN)

MARK SERVES LOCATION PUMP TYPE GPM HEAD EFF HP V PH HZ RPM MATERIAL DIA X DEPTH BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES

PUMP MIN SIZE MECH

MOTOR DATA BASIN DATA

SUMP PUMP SCHEDULE

E. OUTLET TEST CONNECTION WITH BALL VALVE AND 3/4" HOSE CONNECTION AND CAP.

D. 1/2" BYPASS PIPING WITH CHECK VALVE AND BALL VALVE.

C. FULL PORT BALL VALVES AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES ON INLETS AND OUTLET.

B. TACO 006 CIRCULATOR (P-1) WITH AQUASTAT, BALANCING VALVE AND CHECK VALVE. SEE PUMP SCHEDULE.

A. MOUNTED TO WELDED UNI-STRUT FRAME.

3. MIXING VALVE STATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING:

2. PRESSURE DROP IS VALVE ONLY PRESSURE DROP AT GPM LISTED.

1. MOUNTING HEIGHT IS A MAXIMUM OF 60-INCHES TO THE TOP OF THE OUTLET.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

TMV-1 RM 121 110° DOMESTIC HOT WATER 40 140 110 2.9 10 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 EXPOSED ON WALL LEONARD TA-F-LF 1,2,3

(TMV-X) (°F) (°F) (°F) (GPM) (PSI) (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) NOTES

MARK LOCATION SERVES EWT EWT LWT CAPACITY DROP INLET INLET RECIRC INLET OUTLET MOUNTING BASIS OF DESIGN MECH

COLD HOT PRESSURE COLD WATER HOT WATER HOT WATER TEMPERED WATER

THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE SCHEDULE

9. PROVIDE WITH POUNDS-TO-INCHES GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR TO REDUCE THE SYSTEM PRESSURE TO APPROXIMATELY THE APPLIANCE PRESSURE SHOWN.

8. PROVIDE OUTSIDE COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE ASSEMBLY WITH VENT CAP AND FLUE CAP.

7. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER’S UL LISTED VENT TERMINATION TO THE OUTDOOR END OF THE VENT TO PREVENT WIND, WATER, DEBRIS OR ANIMALS FOR OBSTRUCTING R ENTERING THE VENT.

6. VENTING: WATER HEATER WILL BE A CATEGORY IV, CONDENSING APPLIANCE UTILIZING SCHEDULED 40 SOLID CORE CPVC PIPE VENTING MATERIAL.

5. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S CONDENSATE NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM.

4. WATER HEATER CONNECTION SIZES: 1-1/2-INCH COLD WATER INLET, 1-1/2-INCH HOT WATER OUTLET, 1-INCH BUILDING RETURN AND 3/4-INCH DRAIN.

3. GAS SPECIFICATIONS: 3/4-INCH MINIMUM GAS SUPPLY LINE, GAS SUPPLY MINIMUM 3.5-INCH W.C., MAXIMUM 14-INCH W.C.

2. ELECTRICAL DATA ABOVE IS FOR BLOWER MOTOR.

1. WATER HEATER SHALL INCLUDE AGA-RATED TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE(S).

MECHANICAL NOTES:

DWH-1 121-MECH 100 ET-1 233 40 140 199.9 120 1 60 5 1,470 PVI CONQUEST 20 L 100A-GCL 1-9

(DWH-X) (GAL) (ET-XX) (GAL/HR) (°F) (°F) (MBH) (LBS)

MARK LOCATION CAPACITY MARK RECOVERY EWT LWT INPUT V PH HZ AMPS WT BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES

TANK TANK MINIMUM OPERATING MECH

EXPANSION ELECTRICAL DATA

DOMESTIC WATER HEATER - GAS FIRED SCHEDULE

6. UNIT HEATER SHALL INCLUDE A REMOTE MOUNTED SINGLE STAGE THERMOSTAT.

5. AIRFLOW CONFIGURATION SHALL BE A FRONT INLET AND TOP OUTLET (FITO).

4. UNIT HEATER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH INTERNAL THERMOSTAT.

3. UNIT HEATER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH BASE KIT.

2. UNIT HEATER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DEAD FRONT DISCONNECT SWITCH.

1. CFM AT 0" ESP AND HIGH FAN SPEED.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

CUH-102 STAIR-1S2 500 8 27,312 60 111 208 3 23 QMARK CU-945 1,2,3,5,6

CUH-101 VESTIBULE-100 250 3 10,242 60 98 208 3 9 QMARK CU-935 1,2,3,4,5

(CUH-X) (°F) (°F)

MARK LOCATION CFM KW BTUH DB DB V PH AMPS BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES

EAT LAT MECH

ELECTRIC COIL DATA MOTOR DATA

CABINET UNIT HEATER - ELECTRIC SCHEDULE

2. INTERCEPTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM A112.14.3 (TYPE C) STANDARD.

1. INTERCEPTOR SHALL HAVE A 4-INCH INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTION, FIELD CUT RISER (FCR1) AND MEMBRANE CLAMPING COLLAR KIT (CC1).

MECHANICAL NOTES:

GI-1 STORAGE-002 CERTIFIED HYDROMECHANICAL 50 40 273 37" x 28" x 21" SCHIER GB3 1,2

(GI-XX) (GPM) (GAL) (LBS) LxWxH (IN) NOTES

MARKLOCATION TYPE

FLOW RATE LIQUID CAP. GREASE CAP. DIM BASIS OFDESIGN

MECH

GREASE INTERCEPTOR SCHEDULE

3. COLOR SHALL BE A STANDARD COLOR(S), PROVIDE COLOR SAMPLES OF GREY BROWN (8019) AND RUNTAL WHITE (9010R).

OVERHEATING IS REMOVED.

OVERHEATING OCCUR AT ANY POINT ALONG HEATING LENGTH. THE LIMIT SWITCH SHALL RESTORE OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY WHEN CAUSE OF

2. AN AUTOMATIC RESET THERMAL LIMIT SWITCH SHALL RUN THE FULL-LENGTH OF THE HEATER AND SHALL TURN OFF HEATING ELEMENTS SHOULD

1. ALL HEATERS AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES SHALL BE LABELED BY UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES, INC.

MECHANICAL NOTES:

FTR-202 GALLERY - 202 WALL MOUNTED 10'-0" 147 1,466 5,000 3 120 1 60 RUNTAL EB3-120D 1,2,3

FTR-201 GALLERY - 202 WALL MOUNTED 10'-0" 147 1,466 5,000 3 120 1 60 RUNTAL EB3-120D 1,2,3

FTR-102 STAIR - 1S3 WALL MOUNTED 8' - 0" 147 1,172 4,000 3 120 1 60 RUNTAL EB3-120D 1,2,3

FTR-101 STAIR - 1S3 WALL MOUNTED 8' - 0" 147 1,172 4,000 3 120 1 60 RUNTAL EB3-120D 1,2,3

(FTR-X) [WATT/LF] (BASIS OF DESIGN)

LENGTH DENSITY [WATTS] [BTU/HR] ELEM. VOLTS PH HZ MANUFACTURER NOTES

MARK SERVES MOUNTING ACTIVE WATT OUTPUT OUTPUT NO. ELECTRICAL DATA MECH

FINNED TUBE RADIATION - ELECTRIC SCHEDULE

CC-1

CC

-103

/30/

2018

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1


UPUP

2

3

A.5 B C

1

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

2

3

A.5 B C

1

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

5' -

0"

5' -

0"

3" WATER SERVICE FORCONT SEE C2.1

6" FIRE SERVICEFOR CONT SEE C2.1

GAS SERVICE UP TOGAS METER (BY UTILITY)

4" W (148 WFU)I.E. = 94'-6" (ARCH)

4" W UP(37 WFU)

2" V UP

4" W UP TO WC-2

2" V UP

4" W UP TO WC-1

2" V UP

4" W UP TO WC-1

2" W UP TO UR-2

2" W UP TO UR-1

2" V UP

4" W UPTO WC-2

1-1/2" W UP TO L-1

1-1/2" V UP

CO

1-1/2" V UP

GAS SERVICE UP TOGAS METER (BY UTILITY)

GAS SERVICE UPTO GAS METERS(BY UTILITY)

2" W UP

2" V UP

3" W UP TO MS-1

2" V UP

3" W UP TO MS-1

FIRE SERVICE

WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE

1

P3.1

11

P3.1

12

P3.1

12

P3.1

4" W UP TO WC-2

3" W UP

2" V UP

4" W UP TO WC-2

2" W UP TO L-1

2" V UP

2" AW UP2" AV UP

1/2" CW &1/2" 110-HW UP

2" AW UP

2" AV UP

1/2" CW &1/2" 110-HW UP

STORAGE

001

STORAGE

002

STAIR

0S4

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" AV UP

2" AV UP

2" AV UP

2" AV UP

1/2" SCW UP

1/2" HW UP1/2" 110 HW CAPPEDFOR FUTURE

4" W (68 WFU)

4" W

(12

5 W

FU

)

4" A

W (4

7 AW

FU)

4" AW (53 AWFU)

2" W (6 WFU)

2" V UP

2" V UP2" W UP

2" W (4 WFU)

2" W UP TO FD

2" W UPTO FD

4" W (64 WFU)

4" W (58 WFU)

GI-1

1-1/2" W UP TO SINK

3" W UPTO FS

1-1/2" AV UP

1/2" SCW UP

3" AW (17 AWFU)

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

3/4" CW UP

1/2" HW UP

3/4" CW &110-HW UP

1/2" CW &110-HW UP

3/4" CW (3 CFU)

SP-3

SP-2

4" W (15 WFU)

2" FD-1

CO

2" AW UPTO FS

1-1/2" AV UP

3" AW (34 AWFU)

1" 110 HW (9 HFU),3" CW (178.5 CFU),3/4" SCW (3 SCFU) &1/2" 110 HWC ( 1 GPM) UP

2" V UP

4" W UP TO STANDPIPE

3" W

4" W (13 WFU)

SET AT 1 GPM

3/4" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM)

2" FM UP FROM SP-3

EXISTING GAS MAIN

1409 SILVER STREET GASSERVICE (BY UTILITY)



EXISTING SANITARYSEWER MAIN

7

P3.1PIPE SLEEVE

TWO-WAY GRADECLEANOUT

14

P3.1P2

9

P3.1TYPICAL ALL UNDERGROUND PIPING

1/2" CW UP

PROVIDE FRAMINGTO SUPPORT UNITABOVE FLOOR

3" CW (224.5 CFU)

4" FD-1CO

10

P3.1

17

P3.13" AW

2" FM 4" W TO SP-3

2" V (6 VFU)

2" V DN

2" V (6 VFU)

2" V

2" FM UP

2" F

M

CO2" V UP

4" W UP

4" W (6 WFU)

1/2" CW UP

AW

W

CC-1

4" W (20 WFU)

AW

W

2" AW UP TO FS

1-1/2" V UP

CC-1

6

P3.1

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D


Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

3:0

1 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

PLU

MB

ING

PLA

N, U

ND

ER

GR

OU

ND

/ B

AS

EM

EN

T L

EV

EL

P0.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

KEYNOTE LEGEND - PLUMBINGKEY VALUE KEYNOTE TEXT

P2 CONTRACTOR TO EXPOSE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER ATWYE IN LOCATION AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CITYOF ASHLAND FOR AN INSPECTION PRIOR TO TAPPING THEEXISTING SEWER MAIN.


PLUMBING PLAN, UNDERGROND / BASEMENT LEVEL

CC

-103

/30/

2018

ATTACHMENT NO. P0.1-1TO CC-1DATE: 03/30/2018

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

2

3

7

A.5 B

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

LOUNGE

105

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

CORRIDOR

108

P2.1

5

BAR

119

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

4" ORD-1(1,575 SF) 4" RD-1

(1,575 SF)

4" ORD-1(1,485 SF)

4" RD-1(1,485 SF)

STORAGE

103

STAIR

1S3STORAGE

104

P2.1

7

CORRIDOR

110

3'-0" MIN

GAS SERVICE DN

P1

P1P1

2 GAS METERS

DWH-1MS-1

SP-1

2" FM DNFROM SP-1

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

P2.1

14"

SD

(1,

485

SF

)

4" O

SD

(1,

485

SF

)

6" SD (3,060 SF)

6" OSD (3,060 SF)

6" OSD (3,060 SF)

6" SD (3,060 SF)

INSTALL AS HIGH ASPOSSIBLE BETWEEN JOISTS

OFFSET PIPING DNTIGHT TO BEAM

COCO

WH-1

FDC

WALL MOUNTED PIV

1-1/2" AV UP

1-1/2" AW UP

1/2" CW & 110-HW UP

1-1/2" AW UP

1-1/2" AV UP

1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW UP

P2.1

2

OFFICE

118

2" AW UP TO FS-1

2" AW UP TO FS-1

2" AW UP TO FS-1

1" G (2 PSI - 920 KBH)

3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM)

1" 110-HW (6.25 HFU)

2 1/2" CW (67.5 CFU)

3/4" CW UP

1-1/2" AV UP (TYP 5)

1" G (2 PSI) UP

1/2" SCW UP

CO

1/2" HW & CW DN TO HB-1 @ 5'-0"FOR SOAP DISPENSER WITHPRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER

2" AW (11 AWFU)

1/2" CW (1.5 CFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

3/4" CW (3.5 CFU)

3/4" 110-HW (3 HFU)

SET AT 1 GPM

1/2" SCW (2 SCFU)

1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM)1" 110-HW (9 HFU)2 1/2" CW (131.5 CFU)

3/4" CW DN

2" AW (1 AWFU)

2 1/2" V (35 AVFU)3/4" HW (3 HFU) &2-1/2" CW (64 CFU) UP2 1/2" CW (67.5 CFU)

2" CW (35.5 CFU)1" 110-HW (4.5 HFU)2" CW (32 CFU)1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

1" 110 HW (9 HFU),3" CW (178.5 CFU),3/4" SCW (3 SCFU) &1/2" 110 HWC ( 1 GPM) DN

1 1/2" SCW (36 SCFU)

16

P3.1

3" V (48 VFU)

3" V (42 VFU)

2" V DN

1 1/4" 110-HW (15 HFU)2 1/2" CW (80.75 CFU)

1" SCW (4.5 SCFU)3/4" 110-HWC (2 GPM)

ET-1

2" V DN

TMV-1 W/ P-1

8

P3.1

12

P3.1

12

P3.1

2" V UP

2" V DN

2" FM DN

2" FM DN TO 4" STANDPIPE WITHAIR GAP FITTING AT 42" A.F.F.

1/2" CW UP TO TRAP PRIMER

CC-1

2

3

7

A.5 B

D

8

C

1

E

5

4

6

F

A.1

2.1

3.9

A

G

OUTDOORSEATING

213

GALLERY

202

CORRIDOR

205

STAIR

2S1

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

CONFERENCEROOM

207

STORAGE

208

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

RECEPTIONHALL

206

STAIR

2S3

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

P2.1

6

STAIR

2S1

4" ORD-1(1,805 SF)

4" RD-1(1,805 SF)

6" ORD-1(3,320 SF)

6" RD-1(3,320 SF)

P2.1

3

BAR

201

6" SD & OSD(5,125 SF) DN

1" G (2 PSI) DN

1" CW UP TORFH-1 (ON ROOF)

13

P3.1

3/4" G (2 PSI) DN

P2.1

4

1-1/2" V DN

A3

2" V DN1/2" HW & CW DN FROM HB-1 @ 5'-0"FOR SOAP DISPENSOR WITHPRESSURE VACUUMM BREAKER

MS-1

WH-1

3/4" CW DN

2" V (20 VFU)

4" V UP TO4" VTR

3/4" G (2 PSI)UP TO RTU-2

3/4" G (2 PSI)UP TO RTU-2

P7

3" V UP TO4" VTR

A1

3" V UP TO4" VTR A2

2" CW (32 CFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

2" CW (32 CFU)1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

3/4" HW (3 HFU) &2-1/2" CW (64 CFU) DN

STAIR

1S1

STAIR

1S3

STORAGE

104

ELEVATORLOBBY

212ELEVATOR

2E1

CO CO

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

LEGEND NOTES

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

3:1

9 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

PLU

MB

ING

PLA

N, M

AIN

& U

PP

ER

LE

VE

LS

P1.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


PLUMBING PLAN, MAIN LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

PLUMBING PLAN, UPPER LEVEL


P1 CONNECT RELOCATED GAS METER TO NEW GAS SERVICEAND EXISTING GAS PIPING SERVING BUILDING. MAINTAINMINIMUM OF 3'-0" FROM ANY DOOR OPENING AND ANYELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND 10-FT CLEARANCE FROMANY AIR INTAKE. COORDINATE LOCATION AND ADDITIONALREQUIREMENTS WITH GAS UTILITY. COORDINATE WORKWITH BUILDING TENANT AND OWNER.

P7 TERMINATE 1" G (2 PSI) WITH VALVE AND CAP (FORFUTURE) 36" AFF.

CC

-103

/30/

2018


5

4

6

A

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

WC-2

WC-1

WC-1

L-1

L-1

FD-1

UR-1

FD-1

WC-2

UR-2

1-1/2" W DN

2" W UPTO FD

2" W UPTO FD

2" V UP

4" W UP TO WC-2

4" W UP TO WC-1

4" W UP TO WC-1

4" W UP TO WC-2

1-1/2" W UP

4" W DN(37 WFU)

4" W (10 WFU)

2" W UP TO UR-1

2" W UP TO UR-2

2" V UP

2" V UP

1-1/2" V UP

2" V UP

2" CW (20 CFU) P6

P6

2" CW (34 CFU)

1-1/2" V UP

3" V UP3" V (22 VFU)

2" V (4 VFU)

2" AW (11 AWFU)

4" W (4 WFU)

2" CW (35.5 CFU)

2" CW (32 CFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

1" 110-HW (4.5 HFU)

3/4" 110-HW (3 HFU)

1/2" CW (1.5 CFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

1/2" CW (1.5 CFU)

3/4" CW (3.5 CFU)3/4" 110-HW (3 HFU)

2

P3.1(TYP)

1/2" 110-HWC (1 GPM)

1/2" SCW (2 SCFU)

1/2" SCW (2 SCFU)

B

P5

CO

2" V (20 VFU)

5

4

6

3.9

A

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

WC-2

UR-1

UR-2

L-1

L-1

WC-1

WC-1

WC-2

FD-1

FD-1

1-1/2" W DN

2" V DN

2" V DN

1-1/2" V DN

2" V DN

2" W DN

2" W DN

1-1/2" V DN

2" V DN

P5

P6 2" CW (20 CFU)

2" CW (30 CFU)P6

1-1/2" V UP (TYP 5)

2" V (17 VFU)

3" V (31 VFU)

3" V (69 VFU)

3" V DN

3" V (32 VFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

2" CW (32 CFU)

2" CW (32 CFU)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

2

P3.1 (TYP)

B

BP5

2" V DNCC-1

CC-1

E F G

MEN'SRESTROOM

112WOMEN'S

RESTROOM

113CORRIDOR

110

L-1

L-1WC-2

2" V UP

WH-1

2" V DN

2" V DN

2" W DN

3" W DN

GAS SERVICE DN

6" SD & OSD UP

3/4" G (2 PSI) UP

8" DSN(3060 SF)

8" DSN(3060 SF)

MS-1

MECH/ELEC

114

1-1/2" V UP3" W UP TO MS-1

3/4" CW DN

3/4"

CW

(3

CF

U)

1/2" 110-HW (1.5 HFU)

1 1/2" CW (14.5 CFU)2" V (5 VFU)

1/2" HW & CW DN TO HB-1 @ 5'-0"FOR SOAP DISPENSER WITHPRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER

1/2" HW & CW UP

1 1/4" G (2 PSI - 1,470 KBTU)

3" W (5 WFU)

6" OSD (3,060 SF)

6" SD (3,060 SF)

1" G (2 PSI - 920 KBH)

3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM)

1" 110-HW (6.25 HFU)

2 1/2" CW (67.5 CFU)WS-1

1 1/4" CW (13 CFU)

DRAIN FROMWS-2 INTO MS

1 1/2" SCW (36 SCFU)

1-1/2" CW& SCW DN

15

P3.1

2

P3.1 (TYP)

A

P5

AP5

3

B C

5

4

3.9

BAR

119

2" AW DN

1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN

2" AV DN

2" AW DN

1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN

2" AV DN12

P3.1

12

P3.1 1

15

FOOD PREP

120

4

6

8

9

10

12

16

16A16B

18

3

KEG COOLER

122

STAIR

1S4

13

7

2" AV UP

2" AV DN

2" AV DN

2" AV DN

4" RD-1(1,575 SF)

4" ORD-1(1,575 SF)

4" S

D (

1,48

5 S

F)

4" O

SD

(1,

485

SF

)

6" OSD (3,060 SF)

6" SD (3,060 SF)

6" SD (3,060 SF) 6" OSD (3,060 SF)

2" FS-1

1/2" SCW DN

1/2" HW DN

CAPPED FOR FUTURE

GI-1

3" FS-1

1 1/2" V (9 AVFU)

2 1/

2" V

(22

AV

FU

)2

1/2"

V (

32 A

VF

U)

2" V (4 AVFU)

2" V (6 AVFU)

2" V (13 AVFU)

1 1/

2" V

(8

VF

U)

1-1/2" AV DN

1-1/2" AW DN

1/2" CW &110-HW DN

1/2" SCW DN

1/2" HW DN

3/4" CD TO FS

2 1/2" V (35 AVFU)

20

1-1/2" V DN2" FS-1

1/2" CW DN

P3

2" V (10 AVFU)

1/2" CW DN

CC-1

P3

P3

EXTEND 1/2" CWTO TRAP PRIMER

EXTEND 1/2" TRAP PRIMERPIPING TO FS-1. MAINTAIN1/4" SLOPE PER FT.


EXTEND 1/2" CWTO TRAP PRIMER


CC-1

3

2.1

3.9

A

BAR

201

1-1/2" AW DN

1-1/2" AV DN

1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN

1-1/2" AW DN

1-1/2" AV DN

1/2" CW & 1/2" 110-HW DN

24

26

27

29

31

32

34

35

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" AV DN

1-1/2" AV DN (TYP 5)

1/2" SCW DN

12

P3.1

12

P3.1

P3

P3

1/2" CW DN

1/2" CW DN


EXTEND 1/2" TRAPPRIMER PIPING TOFS-1. MAINTAIN1/4" SLOPE PER FT.

CC-1

7

G

CATERINGSTAGING

116

1-1/2" WUP TOS-1

2" W DN

23

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" V DN

3/4" CW (3 CFU)

3/4" 110-HW (3 HFU)

6" OSD (3,060 SF)

6" SD (3,060 SF)

1" G (2 PSI - 920 KBH)

1" 110-HW (10.75 HFU)

2 1/2" CW (75 CFU)

2 1/2" CW (78 CFU)

1 1/4" 110-HW (13.75 HFU)

3/4" 110-HWC (1 GPM)

1" 110-HW (6.25 HFU)

2 1/2" CW (67.5 CFU)

2" V UP & DN

2" W DN,1-1/2" V UP

3" V UP

1-1/4" CW UP

1 1/2" SCW (36 SCFU)

16

CC-1

7

8

G

CATERINGSTAGING

210

36

2" F

S-1

6" RD-1(3,320 SF)

6" ORD-1(3,320 SF)

6" S

D (

3,32

0 S

F)

2" V

(4

VF

U)

A2

4" V UP TO4" VTR

2" V DN

1" CW UP TO RFH-1 & 1-1/4" CW DN

1/2" DRAIN DN TO FS-1 FROM RFH-1

2" V DN

1-1/2" V DN 2" V UP

2" V (8 VFU)

3" V DN

16

CO CO

6" O

SD

(3,

320

SF

)

CC-1

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D


Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

3:3

5 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

PLU

MB

ING

LA

RG

E S

CA

LE

PLA

NS

P2.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1

5 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RESTROOM 106 & 107

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1



P3 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SIOUXCHIEF MODEL 695-ES05 ELECTRONIC TRAP SEALPRIMER SYSTEM. SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE 120 VACCONTROL UNIT WITH 24 HOUR TIMER WITH RELAY,LEAD FREE VACUUM BREAKER, ELECTRONICSTAINLESS STEEL NORMALLY CLOSED SOLENOIDVALVE WITH DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD AND 1/2-INCHCOMPRESSION CONNECTORS MOUNTED IN ASTAINLESS STEEL SURFACE MOUNTED ENCLOSURE.

P5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER (WHA). LETTERDENOTES PDI RATING. INSTALL NORMALLY OPENBALL VALVE IN BRANCH PIPE (FOR ISOLATION OFWHA) AND LOCATE BEHIND HARD CEILING ACCESSPANEL. SEE DETAIL 5/P3.1.

P6 RUN WATER PIPING FULL SIZE THE ENTIRE LENGTHOF THE CHASE. BRANCH OFF TO FIXTURES WITHPIPE SIZES PER THE PLUMBING FIXTURECONNECTION SCHEDULE.

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1


SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1

1 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RMS 119 & 120

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1

3 LARGE SCALE PLAN, BAR 201

16. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN ALL FIXTURE PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS AND ROUGH-IN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH EQUIPMENT BEING PROVIDED.

15. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL WATER HEATER.

DURING CONSTRUCTION. SHORT RADIUS FACTORY "ELLS" ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

14. BEVERAGE CONDUIT TO BE PVC / EMT WITH SMOOTH INTERIOR AND ONE MINIMUM 24-INCH RADIUS SWEEP BEND AT EACH END. PVC / EMT TO BE SEALED

13. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL A CHECK VALVE IN CARBONATOR WATER SUPPLY LINE.

12. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL A GAS SOLENOID VALVE WITH INTERLOCK TO EXHAUST VENTILATOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM.

11. COOKING EQUIPMENT GAS PRESSURE TO BE 7-14" W.C. FOR NATURAL GAS AND 10" W.C. FOR LP GAS.

IS SET IN PLACE.

10. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO MOUNT ALL DISPOSERS FAUCETS, BASKET DRAINS, TO / ON EQUIPMENT WITH FINAL CONNECTION TO ROUGH-IN(S) AFTER EQUIPMENT

9. INSULATE 140°F OR HIGH WATER LINES RUNNING FROM WATER HEATER TO FINAL HOOK-UP ON EQUIPMENT.

8. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL INDIRECT WASTE LINES (I.E.: WALK-IN COOLERS/FREEZERS, REFRIGERATED BASES, HOT WELLS).

7. ALL DRAIN LINES ARE TO BE TRAPPED. SUPPLY ALL INDIRECT WASTELINES WITH A TRAP AND AN AIR GAP AT FLOOR RECEPTACLE.

ICE MAKER(S), STEAMER(S), ETC.

6. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS IN LINE BEFORE ALL SOLENOID VALVES. I.E.AT DISHWASHER, DISPOSER(S),

5. ALL WATER LINES TO BE VALVED AT STUB-IN LOCATIONS.

4. ALL PLUMBING CONNECTION HEIGHTS ARE TO CENTER LINE OF ROUGH-IN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3. WATER AND DRAIN LINES TO BE INSIDE OF WALLS, SURFACE MOUNTED WORK IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.

2. ALL WORK TO BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING CODES.

REQUIREMENTS REFER TO MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS

1. THE PLANS SHOW ONLY THE REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED BY THE FOOD SERVICE CONTRACTOR, FOR ALL OTHER

PLUMBING REMARKS:

36 1 SINK, NSF, 3 COMPARTMENT, 18 GAUGE 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO FLOOR SINK

35 1 DISPENSER, BEER

34 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 12" 1-1/2" 14

32 1 UNDERBAR DRY STORAGE 1" TO FLOOR SINK

31 1 UNDERBAR ICE BIN 1/2" TO FLOOR SINK

29 1 WAREWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 6" 1/2" 5/8" TO FLOOR SINK



24 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 12" 1-1/2" 14 TO FLOOR SINK

23 1 SINK, NSF, 3 COMPARTMENT, 18 GAUGE 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO FLOOR SINK

20 1 ICE MAKER W/ BIN 1/2" 3/4" TO FLOOR SINK

18 1 WALK-IN COOLER 3/4" TO FLOOR SINK

16B 1 WAREWASHER, DOOR TYPE, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 73" 1/2" 140 42" 1-1/2" TO FLOOR SINK

16A 1 DISHTABLE, STRAIGHT, 3 COMPARTMENT SINK 1/2" 16" 1/2" 16" 2" TO FLOOR SINK

16 1 HAND SINK, WALL MOUNTED 1/2" 20" 1/2" 120 20" 1-1/2" 24

15 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 120 12" 1-1/2" 14





8 1 WAREWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER, HIGH TEMP 1/2" 6" 5/8" TO FLOOR SINK





1 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2" 12" 1/2" 120 12" 1-1/2" 14

[IN] [IN] [IN] [DEG. F.] [IN] [IN] [IN] [IN]

SIZE HEIGHT AFF SIZE TEMP HEIGHT AFF DIRECT HEIGHT AFF INDIRECTITEM # QTY CATEGORY

CW CONN HW CONN WASTEPLUMBINGREMARKS

FOOD SERVICE PLUMBING CONNECTION SCHEDULE

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1

2 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RM 116

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"P2.1

4 LARGE SCALE PLAN, RM 210

CC-1

CC

-103

/30/

2018

ATTACHMENT NO. P2.1-1TO ADDENDUM 1DATE: 03/30/2018

CC-1

L-1

L-1WC-2

WC-2

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

3" FS-1

2" FS-1

WC-2

L-1

L-1

WC-1

WC-1

WC-2

WC-1WC-1

WC-2

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

2" FS-1

L-1

L-1

WC-2

2" FS-1

FD-1

FD-1

FD-1

FD-1

4" W (68 WFU)

4" W (125 WFU)

4" W (121 WFU)

4" AW (47 AWFU)

3" AW (27 AWFU)

3" AW (21 AWFU)1 1/2" AW (1 AVFU)

3" V (48 VFU)

2" V (8 VFU)

2" V (4 VFU)

MS-1

DECO4" W (145 WFU)

4" W (125 WFU)

4" W (4 WFU)

2" W (1 WFU)

4" W (15 WFU)

MS-1

#16

#16

2" V (4 VFU)

2" V (3 VFU)

2" V (2 VFU)2" W (6 WFU)

2" W (4 WFU)

4" W (68 WFU)

1 1/2" AV (1 AVFU)

2" AW (4 AWFU)

3" V (21 VFU)

3" V (27 VFU)

3" V (31 VFU)

3" V (35 VFU)

3" V (33 VFU)

3" V (39 VFU)3" V (69 VFU)

3" V (30 VFU)

4" W (4 WFU)

4" W (4 WFU)

4" W (10 WFU)

4" W (14 WFU)

4" W (4 WFU)

1 1/2" V (1 VFU)

1 1/2" V (1 VFU)

CO

2" V (20 VFU)

4" VTR

2" V (4 VFU)

2" V (5 VFU)

2" V (9 VFU)

1 1/2" V (1 VFU)

GI-1

#16

4" FD-1

SP-3

MS-1

#1

#15

#24

#34

SP-2

2" FM

4" W (20 WFU)

4" W (68 WFU)

4" W (64 WFU)

4" W (60 WFU)

4" W (58 WFU)1 1/2" W (2 WFU)

4" W (10 WFU)

1 1/2" AW (1 AWFU)

2" AW (11 AWFU)

4" W (8 WFU)

4" W (37 WFU)

2" W (2 WFU)

2" W (2 WFU)

4" W (6 WFU)

1 1/2" AV (3 AVFU)

1 1/2" AV (3 AVFU)

1 1/2" AV (3 AVFU)1 1/2" AV (3 AVFU)

2" V (6 VFU)

1 1/2" V (1 AVFU)

CO

2" V (17 VFU)

2" V (14 VFU)

2" V (10 VFU)

2" V (4 VFU)

2" V (16 VFU)

3" V (22 VFU)2" V (20 VFU)

3" V (26 VFU)2" V (6 VFU)

2" V (6 VFU)

2" FM

2" V

4" W (6 WFU)

1 1/2" V (8 VFU)

2" V (3 AVFU)

2" V (4 AVFU)

2" V (6 AVFU)

1 1/2" V (1 AVFU) 2" V (10 AVFU)

3" V (48 VFU)

3" AW

3" AW (17 AWFU)

3" AW (34 AWFU)

CO

4" W (13 WFU)

4" VTR

4" VTR

3" W (5 WFU)

3" W (5 WFU)

2" V (10 VFU)

2" V (5 VFU)

2" V (15 VFU)

3" W (5 WFU)

2" V (2 VFU)

2" AW (3 AWFU)

1 1/2" V (3 AVFU)

2" V (3 AVFU)

2 1/2" V (35 AVFU)

2" FD-1

4" STANDPIPE FORELEVATOR SUMP

2" V (6 VFU)

2" W (2 WFU)

2" V (7 VFU)

4" AW (53 AWFU)

2" AW (3 AWFU)

2" V (3 AVFU)

2" AW (3 AWFU)

2" AW (1 AVFU)

1 1/2" V (3 VFU)

1 1/2" V (5 VFU)

2" W (3 WFU)

2" V (1 AVFU)1 1/2" V (9 AVFU)

2" V (13 AVFU)

2 1/2" V (22 AVFU)

2" AW (1 AVFU)

2" AW (3 AWFU)

3" V (42 VFU)

4" V (56 VFU)

3" AW (34 AWFU)

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:1

3:4

0 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_M

P_2016_tm

cdevitt@

dlrgro

up.c

om

.rvt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

PLU

MB

ING

WA

ST

E A

ND

VE

NT

RIS

ER

SP

4.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

NO SCALEP4.1

1 WASTE & VENT RISER DIAGRAM

CC

-103

/30/

2018


W

AW

AW

W

A3

A1

A2

V

AV

CC-1

AV

V

S

S

S CO2

CO

2S

S

SCO2

CO

2S

S

TT

S CO2

SS

FS

FS

S

S

SS

S

J

M

TV

AV

TS

TV

TV

HD TS AV

HD

TS

AV

J

M

J

J

J

ST

S

CO2

CO

2

CO2

S CO2

S

S

S

S

S

JJ

SS

TS AV

TV

V

TV

HD TS AV

HD

TS

AV

J

J

J

J

S

S

S

TV

J

J

J

JJ

J

STORAGE

001

STORAGE

002

STAIR

0S4STAIR

0S1

1B - 19

ATU-001

ATU-002

SP-2

SP-3

1B - 76

28

28

1C - 38

1C - 21

29

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

LOUNGE

105

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CORRIDOR

108STAIR

1S1

BAR

119

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

STAIR

1S3

STAIR

1S4

STORAGE

104

CHASE

124

A/V

111

CORRIDOR

110

MDP

1

4

1

84"TV

INV-1A

INV-1B

INV-1C

60"TV

FB-1

FB-1

FB-1

5

FB-2

FB-2

6

1A - 15

1A - 1

1A - 21

1A - 19

1A - 17

1C - 17

1B - 1

DWH-1

1A- 3

1A- 5

1A- 7

1A- 9

1B- 251B- 23

1B - 35

1B - 37

1B - 41

1B - 39

1B- 4,6

1B- 29

1B- 31

1B - 27

1B

1C

1A

7

7

INV-1F

INV-1DINV-1E

FB-4

FB-3

OFFICE

118

1B - 21

8

9

1A-23,25,27,29,31,33

1C - 19

10

1B - 28

1B - 30

11

12

10

15

EF-2

EF-3

SP-1

ATU-105

1A - 11

1A - 13

ATU-104

ATU-103

ATU-106

ATU-101

ATU-102

90"1A- 35

21

E2.1

5

23

E6.1

15Sim

25

25

25

1B - 61

27

CUH-101

CUH-102

WS-1

72"

30

31

1B - 59

1A - 32

32

33

1B - 84

34

FTR-101 FTR-102

1A - 37

OUTDOORSEATING

213

GALLERY

202

CORRIDOR

205

STAIR

2S1

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

CONFERENCEROOM

207STORAGE

208

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

RECEPTIONHALL

206

STAIR

2S3

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

BAR

201

ELEVATORLOBBY

212

WP

WP

TV

2

3

2A - 7

96"TV1C- 1

INV-2A

FB-2

FB-2

6

1C- 9

1C - 15

1C - 13

1C- 3

1C- 11

2A - 21

2A- 13

2A- 15

2A- 17

2A- 19

2A - 27

2A - 29

2A - 31

2A - 37

2A - 35

2A - 33

2A- 9

2A- 1,3,5

2A

36"

FB-4

9

FB-2

11

2A - 23

1C- 5,7

15

ATU-204

ATU-203

ATU-205

ATU-202

SSOU-1

SSIU-1

EF-1

2A - 25

ATU-201

RWP

24

25

RTU-2

RTU-1RWP

24

SSIU-2

SSOU-2

ELEVATOR

2E1

1C - 42

34

FTR-201

FTR-202

POWER NOTES(TYPICAL ALL POWER SHEETS)

1. MOUNT POWER RECEPTACLES DENOTED 'TV' AT THE SAME HEIGHTAND WITHIN 8" OF ASSOCIATED LOW VOLTAGE TV OUTLET.

2. RECEPTACLES DENOTED 'R' OR 'ROOF' SHALL BE MOUNTED TO AUNISTRUT FRAME ON ROOF, GFCI-TYPE AND MOUNTED IN AWEATHERPROOF BOX WITH WEATHERPROOF IN-USE COVER A MINIMUMOF 18" ABOVE ROOF STRUCTURE.

3. SPECIAL RECEPTACLES: TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION,VERIFY JUNCTION BOX AND WALL PLATE REQUIREMENTS FORSPECIALTY DEVICES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

4. VERIFY OWNER'S PREFERENCE FOR PANEL DIRECTORIES.DIRECTORIES SHALL REFLECT OWNER'S NUMBERING SCHEME AND NOTTHE ARCHITECTURAL NUMBERING SCHEME. OBTAIN REQUIRED INPUTFROM OWNER PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF TYPED PANEL DIRECTORIES.

5. PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 24-INCHES SEPARATION BETWEEN BOXESLOCATED BACK-TO-BACK AT ALL FIRE-RATED WALLS.

6. PROVIDE POWER FROM DESIGNATED 20A/1P BREAKER IN PANEL 1CTO EACH SMOKE DAMPER IN AREA. WIRE THRU FIRE ALARM SYSTEMRELAYS.

7. SEE SCHEDULE SHEETS FOR CONNECTIONS TO ALL MECHANICALEQUIPMENT, INCLUDING DISCONNECTS & STARTERS PROVIDED BYDIVISION 26. COORDINATE MOUNTING OF DISCONNECTS AND STARTERSWITH SURROUNDING EQUIPMENT AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE CLEARANCESAS REQUIRED BY NEC.

8. SEE MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS TO CONFIRMLOCATIONS OF ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT, WATER HEATERS, PUMPS,EXHAUST FANS, DAMPERS, THERMOSTATS, HUMIDISTATS, SENSORS,CONTROL DEVICES, CONTROL PANELS, ETC.

15

16

19

20

18

22

17

13

1B - 43

1B - 45,47

1B- 49

1B - 3

1B- 8,10

ATU-108

ATU-107

1B- 32 1B- 34 1B- 36 1B- 38

1B- 7 1B- 401B- 91B- 131B- 11

1B- 5

92"1B- 17

92"TV1B- 3392"

1B- 15

NEMA6-20R1B- 53,55

1B- 57

26

2626

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

BE

NJA

MIN

TA

LP

OS

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

1:1

4 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_E

L_2016_m

wurs

t.rv

t

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

PO

WE

R P

LA

NS

E2.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

KEYED NOTES

KEY

VALUE KEY TEXT

23 COORDINATE RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS WITH OWNER'SA/V CONTRACTOR. RECEPTACLES CAN BE SURFACEMOUNTED.

24 RECEPTACLE PROVIDED WITH AND MOUNTED TOMECHANICAL UNIT. CIRCUIT AS SHOWN.

25 ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND BOXES THIS SPACEPRE-COLORED BLACK. SEE SPECIFICATION.

26 PROVIDE SINGLE-GANG BOX AT 48" WITH 1"C TO PANEL 1BFOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT.

27 EXISTING PANEL TO BE MAINTAINED DURINGCONSTRUCTION UNTIL THE TASTING ROOM CLOSES FORREMODEL. SEE DEMOLITION ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FORTEMPORARY POWER FEED INFORMATION. TEMPORARYPOWER TO BE ESTABLISHED PRIOR TO DEMOLISHINGEXISTING SERVICE TO THE BUILDING. COORDINATE ANYOUTAGE WITH THE OWNER.

28 POWER FOR SUMP PUMP, GFCI RECEPTACLE TO BEPROVIDED WITH AUDIBLE ALARM.

29 RECIRCUIT EXISTING RECEPTACLES TO NEW PANEL.

30 POWER FOR WATER HEATER RECIRCULATING PUMP.COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.

31 PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNT ROUGH-IN JUNCTION BOXFOR MECHANICAL SENSOR(S) AS NEEDED WITH CONDUITROUTED DOWN WALL IN FOOD PREP ROOM 120.

32 POWER FOR WATER SOFTENER WS-1. COORDINATEWITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.

33 TEMPORARY METER LOCATION, DEMOLISH ONCE THEGLACIAL TILL TASTING ROOM CLOSES FORCONSTRUCTION. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEET E5.1 FORDETAILS.

34 POWER FOR TRAP PRIMERS, COORDINATE 120VCONNECTION AND LOCATION WITH PLUMBINGCONTRACTOR.

KEYED NOTES

KEY

VALUE KEY TEXT

12 ROUTE CONDUITS UP EXISTING WALL FROM PANEL 1C TO1ST LEVEL STRUCTURE TO FEED CEILING LOADS ON 1STLEVEL AND FLOOR LOADS ON 2ND LEVEL. COMBINECIRCUITS AND INCREASE CONDUIT SIZE PER NEC WHEREPOSSIBLE TO REDUCE CONDUIT QUANTITIES.COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH HAND RAIL. UTILIZECOMPRESSION FITTINGS AND MINIMIZE WALL SUPPORTS.

13 PROVIDE NEW 20A, 3 WIRE CORD AND NEMA 5-20R PLUGFOR EXISTING REFRIGERATOR UNIT.

14 MOUNT RECEPTACLES THIS ROOM AT 48 INCHES UNLESSNOTED OTHERWISE. LABEL ALL RECEPTACLES THISROOM WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER.

15 DISHWASHER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION AT 18 INCHES,(3) #8, #10G, 3/4" C.

16 BEVERAGE COOLING SYSTEM POWER, (3) #10, #10G, 3/4"C.

17 ALL CONDUIT IN KEG COOLER IS TO BE BUILT INTO WALLPANELS. EXPOSED CONDUIT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLEEXCEPT WHERE NOTED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TOPROVIDE ALL ROUGH-INS AND INTERCONNECTIONSREQUIRED FOR KEG COOLER INCLUDING CONNECTIONSTO COMPRESSOR, BLOWER COIL, TIMER, HEATERS, ANDLIGHTING. COORDINATE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSWITH COOLER PROVIDER.

18 ROUTE CONDUIT TO JUNCTION BOX ON EVAPORATORCOIL. EXPOSED CONDUIT IS ACCEPTABLE FOR THISLOCATION.

19 PROVIDE ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONS FOR KEGCOOLER TIME CLOCK AND THERMOMETER.

20 PROVIDE ADDITIONAL JUNCTION BOXES AS NEEDED FORKEG COOLER SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS.

21 POWER FOR ICE MACHINE, COORDINATE LOCATION WITHOWNER. PROVIDE NEW 20A, 3 WIRE CORD AND NEMA5-20R PLUG.

22 CONDENSER WIRING: (3) #10, #10G, 3/4" C. CONDENSERLOCATED ON ROOF. PROVIDE NEMA 3R 30A/3PDISCONNECT MOUNTED TO UNISTRUT FRAME.COORDINATE LOCATION WITH COOLER INSTALLER.PROVIDE PATHWAY AS NEEDED BETWEEN CONDENSERCOOLER.

KEYED NOTES

KEY

VALUE KEY TEXT

1 INSTALL DEVICES AND CONDUIT 12 INCHES ABOVE MAINLEVEL FINISHED FLOOR.

2 40A/3P ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH SHUNT TRIPACCESSORY. CONNECT SHUNT TRIP TO PUSH BUTTON INPIT AND FA CONTROL MODULE.

3 30A/3P DISCONNECT FUSED AT 15A FOR ELEVATOR CABLIGHTS.

4 ELEVATOR STOP SWITCH. CONNECT TO SHUNT TRIPBREAKER IN ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM 211. MOUNT 42INCHES ABOVE MAIN LEVEL FINISHED FLOOR.

5 FLOOR BOX FB-1 (TYP), CAST IRON FOR ON-GRADEAPPLICATION, DUPLEX COVER PLATE FOR TILEINSTALLATION WITH FLIP LID, BRASS FINISH. PROVIDELEGRAND 887B-895T OR APPROVED EQUAL.

6 FLOOR BOX FB-2 (TYP), STAMPED STEEL FORABOVE-GRADE APPLICATION, DUPLEX COVER PLATE FORTILE INSTALLATION WITH FLIP LID, BRASS FINISH.PROVIDE LEGRAND 885B-895T OR APPROVED EQUAL.

7 MOUNT RECEPTACLE INSIDE OF CABINET FOR POSPOWER. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT ANDGROMMET IN COUNTER.

8 FLOOR BOX FB-3 (TYP), EPOXY COATING FOR ON-GRADEAPPLICATION, 4-GANG. PROVIDE LEGRAND EFB45S-OGBOX OR APPROVED EQUAL, EFB8-MB 4-GANG MOUNTINGBRACKET FOR DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS, ANDFLUSH STYLE COVER WITH SOLID LID EFB45BTBZ,BRONZE FINISH.

9 FLOOR BOX FB-4 (TYP), STAMPED STEEL FORABOVE-GRADE APPLICATION. 4-GANG. PROVIDE LEGRANDEFB45S BOX OR APPROVED EQUAL, EFB8-MB 4-GANGMOUNTING BRACKET FOR DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS,AND FLUSH STYLE COVER WITH SOLID LID EFB45BTBZ,BRONZE FINISH.

10 STACK INVERTERS ON WALL .

11 ROUTE CONDUITS UP EXISTING WALL TO ABOVEACCESSIBLE CEILING ON 2ND LEVEL TO FEED CIRCUITSFROM PANEL 1C. COMBINE CIRCUITS AND INCREASECONDUIT SIZE PER NEC WHERE POSSIBLE TO REDUCECONDUIT QUANTITIES. ROUTE CONDUIT STRAIGHT UPWALL TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. COORDINATEINSTALLATION WITH HAND RAIL. UTILIZE COMPRESSIONFITTINGS AND MINIMIZE WALL SUPPORTS.

CC

-13/

30/1

8A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1


POWER PLAN - BASEMENT LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

POWER PLAN - MAIN LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

POWER PLAN - UPPER LEVEL

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.1

5 LARGE SCALE - FOOD SERVICE 120

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

S

S

F

F

F

75

F

75

F

75

F

75

F

30

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

FSTSM PIV

SS

FS

FS

S

S

SS

S

F F

F

F

F

15

F

110

F

110

P

P

P

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

30

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

75

F

75

F

75

F

75

F

30

F

30

F

30

F

15

P

DD

PP

PP

P

J

D

P

P

P

FACP

FA

A

M

TV

AV

TS

TV

V

J

TV

HD TS AV

HD

TS

AV

JJ

J

J

F

15

F

15

F

15

M

J

J

J

S

S

F

F

F

F

110

F

75

F

75

F

75

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

15

F

110

F

110

F

30

F

30

P

P

P

P P

MR

D

P

P

P

P

JJ

SS

TS AV

TV

V

TV

HD TS AV

HD

TS

AV

J

J

PD

PD

F

30

F

30

F

15

J

J

STORAGE

001

STORAGE

002

STAIR

0S4STAIR

0S1

4 7

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

LOUNGE

105

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CORRIDOR

108

STAIR

1S1

BAR

119

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

STAIR

1S3

STAIR

1S4

STORAGE

104

CHASE

124

A/V

111

CORRIDOR

110

5

6

E6.1

23Sim

E6.1

23Sim

42"

8

5

6

9

.

.

11

11

12

E6.1

24Sim

E6.1

25Sim E6.1

25Sim

E6.1

23Sim

14

14

16

18

19

19

19

OUTDOORSEATING

213

GALLERY

202

CORRIDOR

205

STAIR

2S1

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

CONFERENCEROOM

207

STORAGE

208

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

RECEPTIONHALL

206

STAIR

2S3

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

BAR

201

ELEVATORLOBBY

212

WP

WP

1

2

3

10

10

13

13

..

14

15

17

19

RT

U-2

SU

PP

LY

RT

U-1

SU

PP

LY

ELEVATOR

2E1

SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOTES(TYPICAL ALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS SHEETS)

1. S OR FS - SMOKE OR FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER SYMBOL.PROVIDE CONNECTION TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. PROVIDE FA RELAY ANDDUCT DETECTOR WITH REMOTE INDICATOR LAMP AND TEST SWITCH FORACTUATION OF DAMPER. DETECTION AND ACTUATION SHALL BECOMPLIANT WITH IBC 2006 SECTION 716.3.2.1 TYPICAL FOR EACH DAMPERSHOWN.

2. PROVIDE RELAY(S) FOR FAN SHUTDOWN OF COMMON DUCTEDMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AT EACH MECH UNIT. (REFER TO HVAC PLANSFOR EQUIPMENT LOCATION AND DUCTS). UNITS LISTED ON E7.2ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES. COORDINATE EFFORT WITH DIVISION 23. FIREALARM SYSTEM SHALL CONNECT DIRECTLY TO MECHANICAL UNITSSHOWN ON SCHEDULE AND SHUT-DOWN CORRESPONDING UNITS UPONACTIVATION OF COMMON DUCTED DETECTION AS SPECIFIED.

3. OUTLETS FOR TELECOM, FIRE ALARM, SECURITY, ACCESS CONTROL,AND ALL OTHER LOW VOLTAGE CABLING: PROVIDE INSULATEDBUSHINGS ON ALL CONDUIT STUB-UPS, INCLUDING UNUSED STUB-UPS ORSTUB-UPS INDICATED FOR FUTURE USE.

4. SLEEVES: PROVIDE (2) 2" CONDUITS AT EACH SLEEVE LOCATIONSHOWN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE BUSHINGS ON BOTH SIDESOF ALL SLEEVES.

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

BE

NJA

MIN

TA

LP

OS

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

1:1

6 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_E

L_2016_m

wurs

t.rv

t

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

SP

EC

IAL S

YS

TE

MS

PLA

NS

E3.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

KEYED NOTES

KEY

VALUE KEY TEXT

11 ROUGH-IN FOR VIDEO WALL, COORDINATE WITH OWNERPROVIDED EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE (3) JUNCTION BOXESSTACKED WITH 1-1/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN BOXES AND1-1/4" C. ROUTED BACK TO A/V ROOM 111. APPROXIMATEBOX MOUNTING HEIGHTS: 60", 87", 114".

12 PROVIDE SURFACE BOXES FOR DEVICES THIS WALL WITHCONDUIT ROUTED THROUGH WALL BEHIND.

13 SURFACE MOUNT SINGLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX FOROWNER PROVIDED SPEAKER AT 10'-0" ABOVE FINISHEDFLOOR WITH 3/4" C ROUTED TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLECEILING IN GALLERY 202.

14 PROVIDE (2) 1" CONDUITS FROM FLOOR BOX STUBBEDOUT AT STRUCTURE OR ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING FORA/V CABLING.

15 (3) 2" C. TO A/V RM 111 BELOW. STUB CONDUITS 8 FEETUP WALL IN STORAGE RM 208 AND DOWN INTO CEILINGSPACE BELOW.

16 (3) 2" C. TO STORAGE ROOM ABOVE.

17 PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED SINGLE-GANG BOX WITH3/4" C. STUBBED INTO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE INRECEPTION HALL 206 FOR SECURITY CAMERA.

18 PROVIDE 2-GANG RECESSED BOX AT 48 INCHES FORCOMM UTILITY ENTRANCE WITH 2" C TO A/V RM 111.

19 ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND BOXES THIS SPACEPRE-COLORED BLACK. SEE SPECIFICATION.

KEYED NOTES

KEY

VALUE KEY TEXT

1 PROVIDE 3/4" C. TO TELEPHONE DEMARCATION POINT INROOM 111 FOR ELEVATOR EMERGENCYCOMMUNICATIONS.

2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULES FOR ELEVATORRECALL. QUANTITY AS REQUIRED.

3 ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE FOR ELEVATOR SHUNTTRIP AND ELEVATOR RECALL, QUANTITY AS REQUIRED.

4 COORDINATE QUANTITY OF TAMPER AND FLOWSWITCHES FOR FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. PROVIDEMONITOR MODULES AND CONNECT TO FIRE ALARMSYSTEM PER SECTION 283100.

5 MOUNT COMM OUTLET INSIDE OF CABINET. COORDINATELOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT AND GROMMET IN COUNTER.

6 ROUTE 1" C. FROM CASEWORK BELOW GRADE INTOBASEMENT AND UP WALL WITH SWEEP BENDS STUBBEDOUT ABOVE CEILING IN RM 120. PROVIDE PROTECTIVEBUSHING ON BOTH ENDS.

7 PROVIDE SPD AT PIV ENTRANCE AND CONNECT TO FIREALARM SYSTEM.

8 PROVIDE 2" SLEEVE AT 7'-10" WITH BUSHINGS ON BOTHSIDES TO FEED TV CONNECTIONS.

9 PROVIDE RECESSED SINGLE-GANG BOX IN METAL PANELFOR SECURITY CAMERA WITH 3/4" CONDUIT TO A/V ROOM111.

10 ROUGH-IN FOR VIDEO WALL, COORDINATE WITH OWNERPROVIDED EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE (3) JUNCTION BOXESSTACKED WITH 1-1/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN BOXES AND1-1/4" C. ROUTED BACK TO A/V ROOM 111. APPROXIMATEBOX MOUNTING HEIGHTS: 52", 79", 106".

CC

-13/

30/1

8A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1


SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - BASEMENT LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - MAIN LEVELNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

SPECIAL SYSTEMS PLAN - UPPER LEVEL

CC-1

CC-1

CC-1

ENGINEER'S NOTES:

1. ESTIMATED MAXIMUM DEMAND: 215 KVA, 594A2. SERVICE FEEDER IS BASED ON A 600 A DISCONNECT3. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING IS BASED ON (3) 75KVA SERVICE TRANSFORMERS WITH 1.8 %Z4. COORDINATE ALL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION WITH OPPD.

NEW POLE MOUNTEDTRANSFORMERS(3) 75 KVA BY OPPD

M

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL "MDP"120/208V 600A, 3PH, 4WSCCR = 32 KA

150/

3

PANEL1A

150

SPD

400/

3

PANEL1B

400

150/

3PANEL

1C

150

150/

3

PANEL2A

150

125/

3

RTU-1FLA = 101 A

SCCR = 24 KA

125/

3

RTU-2FLA = 99 A

SCCR = 20 KA

SEE CONNECTION SCHEDULES SHEET E7.2 FORADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION.

600

METER AND CTS PROVIDED BY OPPD, INSTALLAND PROVIDE CABINET AND MOUNT ON BACK OFBUILDING AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.

PROVIDE SERVICE CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT TO OPPDPEDESTAL AT BASE OF NEW TRANSFORMER POLE.

600/

3

SPACE FOR (2)225A/3P CIRCUIT

BREAKERS

MECH/ELECROOM 114

GROUND BAR

NEUTRAL

GROUND

MDP

#3/0 BJ TOBLDG STEEL

#3/0 GEC TOWATERENTRANCE

#4 GEC TOCONCRETEENCASEDELECTRODE

1/0 SBJ

#6 GEC TODEEP DRIVENGROUND RODIN TEST WELL

FEEDER SIZING NOTES:

1. FEEDERS SHALL BE 4 WIRE (4W), ABCNG, UNLESS DENOTED WITH:

"3W" WHICH SHALL BE 3 WIRE (3W), ABCG

"K" WHICH SHALL BE 4 WIRE, ABCNG, WITH OVERSIZED NEUTRAL

2. ALL FEEDERS HAVE EQUIPMENT GROUND.

3. NOT ALL SIZES USED.

4. CONDUITS INDICATED USE WORST CASE FOR EMT, IMC, RMC, RNC-40, FMC, LFMC.

5. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS BASED ON AA-8000 SERIES ALLOY, COMPACT STRANDED CONDUCTORS, NEC TABLES 310.16 AND 5A.

3ø FEEDER SCHEDULE - Al

MARK FEEDER 4W FEEDER 3W FEEDER K

(AMPACITY) # SETS ø & N GND C # SETS ø GND C # SETS ø #N / SET N GND C

100 1 1/0 6 2" 1 1/0 6 1½" 1 1/0 1 250 6 2"

110 1 1/0 4 2" 1 1/0 4 1½" 1 2/0 1 300 3 2"

125 1 2/0 4 2" 1 2/0 4 2" 1 3/0 1 350 2 2½"

150 1 3/0 4 2" 1 3/0 4 2" 1 4/0 1 500 2 2½"

175 1 4/0 4 2½" 1 4/0 4 2" 1 250 2 4/0 3 3"

200 1 250 4 2½" 1 250 4 2½" 1 300 2 250 3 3"

225 1 300 2 3" 1 300 2 2½" 1 400 2 300 1/0 3½"

250 1 350 2 3" 1 350 2 2½" 1 500 2 350 1/0 3½"

300 1 500 2 3½" 1 500 2 3" 1 600 2 500 1 4"

400 2 250 1 2½" 2 250 1 2½" 2 300 2 250 1/0 3"

500 2 350 1/0 3" 2 350 1/0 2½" 2 500 2 350 3/0 3½"

600 2 500 2/0 3½" 2 500 2/0 3" 2 600 2 500 3/0 4"

800 3 400 3/0 3" 3 400 3/0 3" 3 500 2 400 4/0 3½"

1000 3 600 4/0 3½" 3 600 4/0 3½" 4 500 2 400 250 3½"

1200 4 500 250 3½" 4 500 250 3" 4 600 2 500 300 4"

ENGINEER'S NOTES:

1. ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO THE EXISTING GLACIAL TILL BUILDING WILL BE COMPLETELYDEMOLISHED, BUT TEMPORARY SERCIE WILL NEED TO BE MAINTAINED TO THE ELECTRICAL PANELUNTIL THE TASTING ROOM CLOSES FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIS DIAGRAM ESTABLISHES A TEMPORARYUTILITY CONNECTION TO MAINTAIN POWER TO THE TASTING ROOM WHILE THE REMAINDER OF THECONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETED.2. COORDINATE ALL UTILITY WORK WITH OPPD.3. INSTALLATION TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND THE AHJ.4. COORDINATE ANY POWER OUTAGE WITH THE OWNER.

EXISTING POLEMOUNTED UTILITYTRANSFORMER

M

RELOCATE EXISTING METER TO BACK OF NEW BUILDINGTEMPORARILY. SEE POWER PLANS FOR LOCATION.

EXISTING GLACIAL TILLELECTRICAL PANEL120/240V, 1 PHASEDEMOLISH, ONLY AFTER THE TASTINGROOM CLOSES FOR REMODEL.

RELOCATE EXISTING OVERHEAD FEED, MAINTAINREQUIRED CLEARANCES.

PROVIDE A NEMA 3R, 400A DISCONNECT, FUSED AT 225AMPS MOUNTED ADJACENT TO METER TO FEED THEEXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL.

ROUTE NEW FEED TO EXISTING PANEL UNDERGROUND.COORDINATE LOCATION WITH CONSTRUCTION.

225

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

BE

NJA

MIN

TA

LP

OS

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

1:1

6 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_E

L_2016_m

wurs

t.rv

t

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

ELE

CT

RIC

AL O

NE

-LIN

E &

GR

OU

ND

ING

DIA

GR

AM

E5.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

CC

-13/

30/1

8A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

GROUNDING DIAGRAM

DEMOLITION/TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

CC-1

CC-1

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

BE

NJA

MIN

TA

LP

OS

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

1:4

1:1

6 A

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_E

L_2016_m

wurs

t.rv

t

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

ELE

CT

RIC

AL S

CH

ED

ULE

SE

7.2

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

CC

-13/

30/1

8A

DD

EN

DU

M C

C-1

EMD CURRENT: 105 A

HVAC 23438 VA 100.00% 23438 VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 107 A

Appliance 500 VA 85.00% 425 VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: 37708 VA

Receptacle 12640 VA 89.56% 11320 VA CONNECTED LOAD: 38598 VA

Lighting 2020 VA 125.00% 2525 VA

LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS

TOTAL AMPS: 108 A 120 A 97 A

TOTAL LOAD: 12730 VA 14238 VA 11618 VA

41 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 42


37 RECEPT - MECH CONTROLS RM 114 20 A 1 180 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 38

35 (G) ICE MAKER - CATERING RM 116 20 A 1 1700 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 36

33 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 34

31 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 500 VA 1 20 A WS-1 32

29 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 160 VA 1 15 A EF-2, EF-3 30

27 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 2760 VA -- -- -- 28

25 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 2760 VA -- -- -- 26

23 RECEPT - A/V RM 111 20 A 1 360 VA 2760 VA 3 30 A CUH-2 24

21 RECEPT - RECEPTION RM 109 20 A 1 900 VA 2000 VA 1 25 A ATU-106 22

19 RECEPT - RECEPTION RM 109 20 A 1 900 VA 2000 VA 1 25 A ATU-105 20

17 RECEPT - RECEPTION RM 109 20 A 1 900 VA 1833 VA -- -- -- 18

15 RECEPT - RESTROOMS 112,113,114 20 A 1 720 VA 1833 VA -- -- -- 16

13 RECEPT - CONF RM 115 20 A 1 720 VA 1833 VA 3 20 A ATU-103 14

11 RECEPT - CONF RM 115 20 A 1 720 VA 1833 VA -- -- -- 12

9 RECEPT - CATERING RM 116 20 A 1 500 VA 1833 VA -- -- -- 10

7 RECEPT - CATERING RM 116 20 A 1 500 VA 1833 VA 3 20 A ATU-104 8

5 RECEPT - CATERING RM 116 20 A 1 500 VA 492 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL RECEPTION 6

3 RECEPT - CATERING RM 116, ICE MAKER 20 A 1 1700 VA 1272 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL SOUTH 4

1 RECEPT - CATERING RM 116 20 A 1 540 VA 244 VA 1 20 A INV-1A, 1F 2

CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

BKR

TRIP POLES A B C POLES

BKR

TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT

(G) PROVIDE GFCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER.

NOTES:

MAIN BREAKER: 150 A WIRES: 4 SCCR: 27 KA

BUS RATING: 150 A PHASES: 3 FED FROM: SEE ONE-LINE

LOCATION: MECH/ELEC 114 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURFACE

PANEL: 1A

Motor 2352 VA 100.00% 2352 VA EMD CURRENT: 186 A




Lighting 7213 VA 125.00% 9016 VA




83 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 30 VA 1 20 A TRAP PRIMERS - BAR 119 84

81 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA -- -- -- 82

79 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA -- -- -- 80

77 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1080 VA 3 15 A CUH-1 78

75 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1176 VA 1 20 A SP-3 76







61 FACP 20 A 1 180 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 62

59 RECEPT - OFFICE 118 20 A 1 540 VA 1333 VA -- -- -- 60

57 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 500 VA 1333 VA -- -- -- 58

55 -- -- -- 1750 VA 1333 VA 3 15 A ATU-108 56

53 (G) INDUCTION COOKTOP 20 A 2 1750 VA 1333 VA -- -- -- 54

51 DWH-1 15 A 1 600 VA 1333 VA -- -- -- 52

49 BEVERAGE COOLING SYSTEM 25 A 1 2052 VA 1333 VA 3 15 A ATU-107 50

47 -- -- -- 1760 VA 3333 VA -- -- -- 48

45 CONDENSER - KEG COOLER RM 122 25 A 2 1760 VA 3333 VA -- -- -- 46

43 EVAPORATOR COIL - KEG COOKER RM... 20 A 1 220 VA 3333 VA 3 35 A ATU-101 44

41 RECEPT - TASTING RM 102 20 A 1 540 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A ATU-002 42

39 RECEPT - FLOOR TASTING RM 102 20 A 1 360 VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 40

37 RECEPT - FLOOR RETAIL RM 101 20 A 1 180 VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 38

35 RECEPT - RETAIL RM 101 20 A 1 180 VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 36

33 RECEPT - TV BAR RM 119 20 A 1 180 VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 34

31 (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR 119 20 A 1 625 VA 500 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 32

29 (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR 119 20 A 1 625 VA 180 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - CEILING TV 30

27 RECEPT - BAR 119 20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A RECEPT - RETAIL RM 101 28

25 RECEPT - ELEV SUMP PUMP 20 A 1 1176 VA 372 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR COUNTER 26

23 RECEPT - ELEV PIT 20 A 1 180 VA 1050 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR PENDANTS 24

21 RECEPT - MECH RM 121 20 A 1 720 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR PENDANTS 22

19 RECEPT - BASEMENT STORAGE 002 20 A 1 540 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR TRACK 20

17 (G) RECEPT - REFRIGERATOR RM 120 20 A 1 912 VA 850 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR TRACK 18

15 (G) RECEPT - FREEZER RM 120 20 A 1 840 VA 500 VA 1 20 A LTG - TRACK RETAIL 16

13 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 500 VA 1878 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL BAR 14

11 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 865 VA 96 VA 1 20 A INV-1B 12

9 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 500 VA 3330 VA -- -- -- 10

7 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 500 VA 3330 VA 2 40 A DISHWASHER - FOOD PREP RM 120 8

5 RECEPT - FOOD PREP, MEAT SLICER 20 A 1 250 VA 3330 VA -- -- -- 6

3 RECEPT - FOOD PREP RM 120 20 A 1 360 VA 3330 VA 2 40 A DISHWASHER - BAR RM 119 4

1 RECEPT - TASTING RM 123 20 A 1 1080 VA 51 VA 1 20 A LTG - ELEVATOR PIT 2


BKR


BKR


PANEL TO BE SINGLE SECTION, (G) PROVIDE GFCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER.

NOTES:

MAIN BREAKER: 400 WIRES: 4 SCCR: 15 KA


LOCATION: CUSTODIAL 121 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURFACE

PANEL: 1B

Motor 1176 VA 100.00% 1176 VA EMD CURRENT: 130 A




Lighting 5996 VA 125.00% 7495 VA




41 SMOKE DAMPERS 20 A 1 0 VA 20 VA 1 20 A TRAP PRIMERS - BAR 201 42

39 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 528 VA 1 15 A EF-1 40

37 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1176 VA 1 20 A SP-2 38

35 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A FTR-202 36

33 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A FTR-201 34

31 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A FTR-102 32

29 SPARE 20 A 1 0 VA 1200 VA 1 20 A FTR-101 30

27 -- -- -- 3500 VA 2333 VA -- -- -- 28

25 -- -- -- 3500 VA 2333 VA -- -- -- 26

23 ATU-201 40 A 3 3500 VA 2333 VA 3 25 A ATU-102 24

21 RECEPT - STORAGE 001 20 A 1 360 VA 1167 VA -- -- -- 22

19 RECEPT - LOUNGE 105 20 A 1 1080 VA 1167 VA -- -- -- 20

17 RECEPT - RESTROOMS 106,107,108,1S1 20 A 1 900 VA 1167 VA 3 15 A ATU-001 18

15 RECEPT - GALLERY RM 202 20 A 1 720 VA 200 VA 1 20 A LTG - FESTOON LTG PATIO 213 16

13 RECEPT - GALLERY RM 202, 203, 204 20 A 1 900 VA 200 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL BAR COUNTER 14

11 (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR 201 20 A 1 390 VA 500 VA 1 20 A LTG - 1ST LEVEL LOUNGE 105 TRACK 12

9 (G) RECEPT - BAR 201 BEER DISPENSER 20 A 1 760 VA 959 VA 1 20 A LTG - FIRST LEVEL LOUNGE 10

7 -- -- -- 3330 VA 1500 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL BAR PENDANTS 8

5 (G) DISHWASHER - BAR RM 201 40 A 2 3330 VA 1312 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL GALLERY 6

3 (G) RECEPT - WINE COOLER BAR 201 20 A 1 390 VA 1144 VA 1 20 A LTG - BASEMENT 001, STAIR S1 4

1 RECEPT - TV BAR RM 201 20 A 1 180 VA 176 VA 1 20 A INV-1C, 1D, 1E 2


BKR


BKR



NOTES:



LOCATION: STORAGE 103 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURFACE

PANEL: 1C

EMD CURRENT: 117 A

Motor 6300 VA 97.94% 6170 VA CONNECTED CURRENT: 116 A

HVAC 25261 VA 100.00% 25261 VA ESTIMATED DEMAND: 42197 VA


Lighting 1829 VA 125.00% 2286 VA





39 INV-2A 20 A 1 224 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 40

37 RECEPT - RECEPTION RM 206 20 A 1 900 VA 0 VA 1 20 A SPARE 38



31 RECEPT - PATIO RM 213 20 A 1 360 VA 1000 VA 3 15 A ATU-205 32



25 RECEPT - STORAGE RM 208 20 A 1 720 VA 1167 VA 3 15 A ATU-204 26

23 RECEPT - MECH 209 20 A 1 720 VA 2500 VA -- -- -- 24






11 LTG - ELEV MACH ROOM 211 20 A 1 62 VA 940 VA -- -- -- 12

9 LTG - ELEV CAB 15 A 1 500 VA 940 VA 2 15 A SSOU-2, SSIU-2 10

7 RECEPT - ELEV MACH RM 211 20 A 1 180 VA 940 VA -- -- -- 8

5 -- -- -- 2100 VA 940 VA 2 15 A SSOU-1, SSIU-1 6

3 -- -- -- 2100 VA 514 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL RECEPTION 4

1 ELEVATOR 30 A 3 2100 VA 524 VA 1 20 A LTG - 2ND LEVEL SOUTH 2


BKR


BKR



NOTES:



LOCATION: MECH/ELEC 209 VOLTS: 120/208 Wye MOUNTING: SURFACE

PANEL: 2A

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE

MARK NO. VOLTAGE POLES HP VA/PHASE CB SIZE DISCONNECT

BRANCH CIRCUIT

P/N - G - C PANEL CIRCUIT NOTES

CUH-101 208 V 3 - 1080 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1B 78,80,82

CUH-102 208 V 3 - 2760 VA 30 A BY DIVISION 23 10 - 10 - 3/4" 1A 24,26,28

DWH-1 120 V 1 - 600 VA 15 A CIRCUIT BREAKER 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1B 51

EF-1 120 V 1 1/6 528 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1C 40

EF-2 120 V 1 - 80 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1A 30 1,2

EF-3 120 V 1 - 80 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1A 30 1,2

FTR-101 120 V 1 - 1200 VA 20 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1C 30 6




SSIU-1 208 V 2 - 0 VA 15 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE 12 - 12 - 3/4" 2A 6,8 3,4

SSIU-2 208 V 2 - 0 VA 15 A MOTOR RATED TOGGLE 12 - 12 - 3/4" 2A 10,12 3,4

SSOU-1 208 V 2 - 940 VA 15 A 30A/3P NON FUSED NEMA 3R 12 - 12 - 3/4" 2A 6,8 3,4,5

SSOU-2 208 V 2 - 940 VA 15 A 30A/3P NON FUSED NEMA 3R 12 - 12 - 3/4" 2A 10,12 3,4,5

PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE

MARK NO. VOLTAGE POLES VA/PHASE CB SIZE DISCONNECT

BRANCH CIRCUIT


RTU-1 208 V 3 12072 VA 125 A BY DIVISION 23 1/0 - 6 - 2" MDP 2,4,6

RTU-2 208 V 3 11854 VA 125 A BY DIVISION 23 1/0 - 6 - 2" MDP 8,10,12

TERMINAL BOX ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE

MARK NO.

SERVED

FROM VOLTAGE POLES KW VA/PHASE MOCP DISCONNECT

BRANCH CIRCUIT


ATU-001 RTU-1 208 V 3 3.5 1167 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1C 18,20,22 1

ATU-002 RTU-1 120 V 1 1.5 1500 VA 20 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1B 42 1

ATU-101 RTU-1 208 V 3 10 3333 VA 35 A BY DIVISION 23 8 - 10 - 3/4" 1B 44,46,48 1

ATU-102 RTU-1 208 V 3 7 2333 VA 25 A BY DIVISION 23 10 - 10 - 3/4" 1C 24,26,28 1

ATU-103 RTU-1 208 V 3 5.5 1833 VA 20 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 1A 14,16,18 1


ATU-105 RTU-1 120 V 1 2 2000 VA 25 A BY DIVISION 23 10 - 10 - 3/4" 1A 20 1

ATU-106 RTU-1 120 V 1 2 2000 VA 25 A BY DIVISION 23 10 - 10 - 3/4" 1A 22 1



ATU-201 RTU-2 208 V 3 10.5 3500 VA 40 A BY DIVISION 23 8 - 10 - 3/4" 1C 23,25,27 1




ATU-205 RTU-2 208 V 3 3 1000 VA 15 A BY DIVISION 23 12 - 12 - 3/4" 2A 32,34,36 1

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTES:1. PROVIDE RELAY TO INTERLOCK FAN WITH LIGHT SWITCH.2. FAN PROVIDED WITH SPEED CONTROLLER SHIPPED LOOSE FOR FIELD WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.3. INDOOR UNIT POWERED FROM OUTDOOR UNIT. PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT AT EACH UNIT.4. PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN SSIU AND SSOU WITH PULL STRING FOR CONTROL WIRING.5. MOUNT DISCONNECT TO UNISTRUT FRAME ON ROOF.6. PROVIDE TOGGLE SWITCH FOR LOCAL DISCONNECTING MEANS. COORDINATE WITH BASE BOARD HEATER CONSTRUCTION, CONCEAL AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE.

TERMINAL BOX SCHEDULE NOTES:1. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM RELAY(S) FOR SHUTDOWN OF COMMON-DUCTED UNITS. REFER TO "SERVED FROM" COLUMN FOR GROUPING OF HEAT PUMPS.

CC-1

UP

UP

RE

F.

UP

UP

RE

F.

UP

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102LOUNGE

105

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CORRIDOR

108

STAIR

1S1

BAR

119

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

STAIR

1S3

STAIR

1S4

STORAGE

104

CHASE

124

A/V

111

CORRIDOR

110

ICE

VESTIBULE

100

OFFICE

118

7

E

A.5 B

6

5

4

3

2

1

C

F

EDGE STIFFENER2-#5 IN 1 CELLGROUT 2 CELLS(TYP UNO)

11' - 0" 2' - 9"

14' -

0"

2' -

6"

10' -

5"

12' -

9"

1' -

3"

13' -

3"

11' -

6"

8' -

3"

20' -

0"

4" CONC SLAB-ON-GRADEWITH 6"x6" - W2.1xW2.1 WWF

OVER VAPOR BARRIERON 4" GRANULAR FILL

TYP FINISH FLOOR EL = 100'-0"

2' - 4"

12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0"

(TYP UNO)

TOF 92'

- 0"

HELICAL PIER50K CAPACITYWORKING LOAD(TYP UNO)

2' - 0"

2' - 0"

2' -

0"

4" CONC SLAB-ON-GRADEWITH 6"x6" - W2.1xW2.1 WWF

OVER VAPOR BARRIERON 4" GRANULAR FILL

FINISH FLOOR EL = 92'-4"

GRADE BEAM3'-2" DEEP (TYP)

BOT FTGSTEP

TOF 98' - 8

"

D

8

6' -

10"

6' -

10"

8' -

0"

2' -

6"

2' -

0"

5' - 0"

2' -

0"

8' - 0"

5' -

2"

TH

IS W

ALL

9' -

5"

TY

PTHIS WALL8' - 9" TYP

TH

IS W

ALL

10' -

8"

TY

P

VERT MAS WALL REINF1- #5 @ 1'-4" OC

S3.1

14

TYP

16

S3.1

S3.1

25TYP

21

S3.1

CTYP

S3.1

21D

TYP

31

S3.1

TYP

S3.1

33

TYP

S3.1

34TYP

45

S3.1

46

S3.1TYP

36

S3.1

TYP

11

S3.1TYP

12

S3.1

2' -

6"

TOF 98' - 8"

13

S3.2

12

S3.2

A.1

3.9

A

2.1

TOF 91' - 4"

TOF 92' - 0"

TOMP 98' - 8"

TOF

91' -

4"

TOMP 98'

- 8"

TOMP 98' - 0"

TOMP 98' -

0"

26

S3.2

CONTRACTOR VERIFY WALL SUPPORTAT LANDING. IF REQUIRED, PROVIDEDOUBLE 2x8 HEADER AND 4x4COLUMN. DOUBLE UP 2 NEARESTFLOOR JOISTS FOR SUPPORT OFCOLUMN AND PROVIDE DOUBLE JOISTHEADER UNDER COLUMN.

3BC6B

3A C4A

3A

3A

3B

3B

3A 3B

TOMP 98'

- 0"

3A

3A

C6B

C6B

C6B

C8A

C8AC8B

C6D C6C

C6D C6C

C6DC6C

C6D

C6C

C6D

C6D

C6B

C6B

C6A

G

C4A

5' - 7"

TOF 92'

- 0"

TOF 92

' - 0"

TOF 92' - 0"

15

S3.2

TOF 92

' - 0"

TOGB 9

2' - 0

"

TOGB 9

2' - 0

"

TOGB 92' - 0"

9 1/4" 6 3/4"

TOPC 99' - 4"

PC5

PC4

PC4

PC1

PC1

PC4

PC3

PC1

PC1PC3

PC3PC1

PC1 PC3

PC1APC3A

TY

P

1' -

4"

THIS WALL7' - 7" TYP

THIS WALL8' - 6" TYP

ST

OO

P

7' -

0"

STOOP

TOF 98' - 8"

TOF 98' - 8"

TYP1' - 0 3/4"

TOMP 98' - 0"

6' - 8"

TOF 92' - 0

"

TYP7' - 8 1/2"

5' - 0

"

3A

45.00°

TOF 92' -

0"

TOF 92' - 0"

21

S3.2 TOGB 99' - 4"

TOPC 98' - 8"

TOGB 99' - 4" TOGB 9

7' - 8

"

TOPC 98' - 8"

TOGB 97' - 8"

44

S3.1

11

S3.1SIM

TOPC 98'

- 8"

TOF 98' - 8"

1'-4"x1'-4" GRADEBEAM WITH 2-#6 T&BW/ #3 CLOSEDSTIRRUPS @ 4'-0" OC

1'-4"x1'-4" GRADEBEAM WITH 2-#6 T&BW/ #3 CLOSEDSTIRRUPS @ 4'-0" OC

CONTRACTOR VERIFYFOUNDATION SUPPORT ALONGEXISTING WALL DURINGEXCAVATION FOR NEWFOOTINGS. UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCE SHALL EXISTINGWALL FOOTING BE UNDERMINED

CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH ELEVATORMANUFACTURER WHICH CMU CELLS TOGROUT FOR ELEVATOR RAIL SUPPORT

TOGB 98' - 0"

TOGB 97

' - 8"

TOGB 9

7' - 8

"

TOGB 9

7' - 8

"

TOGB 9

8' - 0

"

STORAGE

001

STORAGE

002

STAIR

0S4STAIR

0S1

7

E

A.5 B

6

5

4

3

2

1

C

F

2x12 @12" OC

2x12 @12" OC

11' - 0" 2' - 9" 5' - 7"

2' - 4"

12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0"

14' -

0"

2' -

6"

10' -

5"

12' -

9"

1' -

3"

13' -

3"

11' -

6"

8' -

3"

20' -

0"

W8x

24

TO

S 9

8' -

3 3

/4"

W8x

24

TO

S 9

8' -

3 3

/4"

D

8

51

S5.1

36

S3.1

A.1

3.9

A

2.1

G

(FV

)(F

V)

S6.1

36

TYP

(EXISTING)

(EXISTING)

2x@ 1'-4" OC

3/4"PLYWOOD

DOUBLE UP STAIRHEADER AND JOISTSSOUTH OF STAIR

REMOVE EXISTING TIMBER BEAM ANDCOLUMNS AND REPLACE WITH LOAD BEARING2x6 WALL ON 1'-0"x1'-0" THICKENED SLABBETWEEN MASONRY PIERS.PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SUPPORT OF EXISTINGFLOOR JOIST DURING REPLACEMENT.

S6.1

43

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

:09:3

0 P

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_S

T_2016_jb

erg

ren.r

vt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

FO

UN

DA

TIO

N A

ND

LO

WE

R L

EV

EL F

RA

MIN

G P

LA

NS

S1.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


FOUNDATION PLANNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

MAIN LEVEL FRAMING PLAN

CC

-13/

30/1

8

CC-1

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

RECEPTIONHALL

109

TASTING ROOM

102LOUNGE

105

MEN'SRESTROOM

107

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

106

CONFERENCEROOM

115

STORAGE

117

MEN'SRESTROOM

112

RETAIL

101

FOOD PREP

120

CATERINGSTAGING

116

MECH/ELEC

114

ELEVATOR

1E1

KEG COOLER

122

PRIVATETASTING

123

STAIR

1S2

STORAGE

103

CORRIDOR

108

STAIR

1S1

BAR

119

MECH/ELEC/CUST

121

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

113

STAIR

1S3

STAIR

1S4

STORAGE

104

CHASE

124

A/V

111

CORRIDOR

110

VESTIBULE

100

OFFICE

118

7

E

A.5 B

6

5

4

3

2

1

C

F

W18x35

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W18x35

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W18x35

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W18x35

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W18x35

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

W16x45

TOS 111' - 10"

W16x36

TOS 111' - 10"

W16x36

TOS 111' - 10"

W21x44

TOS 111' - 10"

W8x

18

TO

S 1

11' -

10"

1/2" PLYWOOD ON2x6 T&G DECKING(TYP UNO)


1 3/4x14 LVL@ 16" OC

@16

" O

C

3x12

@16

" O

C

@16

" O

C@

16"

OC

@16

" O

C@

16"

OC

3x12

3x12

3x12

3x12

(2) 1

3/4

x14

LVL

(2) 1 3/4x14 LVL

(2) 1

3/4

x14

LVL

(2) 1

3/4

x14

LVL

W16x31

BOL 109' - 4"

ML3T-PL

BOLTED

11' - 0" 2' - 9" 5' - 7"

14' -

0"

2' -

6"

10' -

5"

12' -

9"

1' -

3"

13' -

3"

11' -

6"

8' -

3"

20' -

0"

2' - 4"

12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0"

D

8W24x94

TOS 111' - 10"

W18x46

TOS 111' - 10"

1 3/4x14 LVL@ 16" OC

1 3/4x14 LVL@ 16" OC

W16x36

TOS 111' - 10"

19' -

9"

W8x18

BOL 107' - 4"

BRG PLATE1/2x7x0'-9"


11

S5.1TYP

12

S5.1TYP

21

S5.1TYP

22

S5.1TYP

26

S5.1

TYP

24

S5.1

33

S5.1TYP

51

S5.1TYP

53

S5.1TYP

12

S6.1TYP

TYP

23

S6.1

TYP

34

S5.1

TYP

24

S6.1

TYP

44

S6.1

1 3/

4x14

LV

L2x12 @12" OC

32

S6.1

45

S5.1

36

S5.1TYP

35

S5.1

44

S5.1

A.1

3.9

A

2.1

W16x31

TOS 112' - 0 3/4"

W16

x31

TO

S 1

12' -

0 3

/4"

56

S5.1

W14x22

TOS 110' - 4 3/4"

33

S6.1

34

S6.1

TYP

31

S6.1

52

S6.1

G

W14x22

TOS 111' - 10"

@12" OC

2x12

EXISTING JOISTS AT THIS ROOF ARE ASSUMEDTO BE 2x12 JOISTS SPACED AT 12" OC.CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY. IF JOISTS ARESMALLER THAN 2x12 AND/OR ARE SPACEDFARTHER APART THAN 12" OC THEY SHALL BEREINFORCED WITH AN ADDITIONAL JOIST ATEACH EXISTING JOIST. FOR OTHER JOISTCONFIGURATIONS CONTACT THE ARCHITECT.

(111'-7")(111'-7")

(113'-1 1/2")(113'-1 1/2")

(113'-1 1/2") (113'-1 1/2")

(113'-1 1/2") (2) 1 3/4x14 LVL

CONTRACTOR VERIFY WALL SUPPORTAT LANDING. IF REQUIRED, PROVIDEDOUBLE 2x8 HEADER AND 4x4COLUMN. DOUBLE UP 2 NEARESTFLOOR JOISTS FOR SUPPORT OFCOLUMN AND PROVIDE DOUBLE JOISTHEADER UNDER COLUMN.

SIMPSON WMU3.56x13.938 HANGERWITH TOP FLANGE CAST INTO CMU ATEACH END OF STAIR BEAM. INSTALL PERMANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.

W8x24 LINTEL@ MECH DUCTTOS EL = 110'-8"

(EXISTING)

(EXISTING)

(FV

)

(FV)

STAIR DELEGATEDDESIGN BY SUPPLIER

41

S6.1

TYP


SIMPSON HU410HANGER TO CMU@ DOUBLE LVL

BRG PLATE1x16x0'-7"

SPACE JOISTS TOAVOID COLUMNS, TYP

11

S6.1

21

S6.1

46

S6.1TYP

GALLERY

202

OUTDOORSEATING

213

STORAGE

208

CONFERENCEROOM

207

MEN'SRESTROOM

204

WOMEN'SRESTROOM

203

STAIR

2S2

MECH/ELEC

209

CATERINGSTAGING

210

STAIR

2S3

STAIR

2S1

RECEPTIONHALL

206

ELEVATORMACHINE

ROOM

211

BAR

201

CORRIDOR

205

ELEVATORLOBBY

212

ELEVATOR

2E1

CC-1

CC-1

7

E

A.5 B

6

5

4

3

2

1

C

W14x22

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

W8x

18T

OS

124

' - 1

1/2

"

ML2T-PL

ML2T-PL

ML2T-PL

11' - 0"

14' -

0"

2' -

6"

10' -

5"

12' -

9"

1' -

3"

13' -

3"

11' -

6"

8' -

3"

20' -

0"

18' - 3 1/8"


D

8W18x35

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

W18x35

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

W14x22

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

W14x22

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

W14x22

TOS 124' - 3 1/2"

2x12@16" OC

2x12@16" OC

2x12@16" OC

2x12@16" OC

19' -

9"

MECH UNIT5000#

MECH UNIT5200#

ML2 ML3

12

S6.1

TYP

TYP

25

S6.1

TYP

51

S5.1TYP

26

S5.1TYP

53

S5.1

2' - 4"

12' - 5" 19' - 7" 18' - 0"

A.1

3.9

A

2.1

54

S5.1

TYP

55

S5.1TYP

HSS6x6x1/4 TUBEFRAMING TYP

W16x45 BOL 121' - 3 1/2"

22

S5.1TYP

DRAG STRUT

DRAG STRUT

31

S5.1 TYP

33

S5.1TYP

51

S6.1

33

S6.1

(124'-5")(124'-5")

(124'-5")(124'-5")

(124'-5")

(124'-5")

(124'-5")(124'-5")

S6.1

53

HSS6x3x1/4 HSS6x3x1/4

21

S6.1

26

S6.1

W8x

18

HOIST BEAM,FIELD LOCATE

26

S6.1

21

S6.1

DOUBLE UP 2x12 JOISTSWHERE SHOWN UNDERROOF TOP MECH UNIT

1 3/

4X11

1/4

LV

L

1 3/

4X11

1/4

LV

L

1 3/

4X11

1/4

LV

L

1 3/

4X11

1/4

LV

L

USE SIMPSON LBV1.8/11.25HANGERS FOR LVL's ATRTU OPENINGS

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

:09:3

1 P

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_S

T_2016_jb

erg

ren.r

vt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

UP

PE

R L

EV

EL A

ND

RO

OF

FR

AM

ING

PLA

NS

S2.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION


UPPER LEVEL FRAMING PLANNORTH

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

UPPER ROOF FRAMING PLAN

CC

-13/

30/1

8

CC-1

CL

MINIMUM NAIL REQUIREMENTS

6d 2

8d

10d

16d

20d

PENNYWEIGHT

(IN)

LENGTH

2 1/2

3

3 1/2

4

0.113

0.131

0.148

0.162

0.192

0.099

BOX WIRENAIL

0.113

0.128

0.135

0.148

SINKER

3 1/4

LENGTH(IN)

0.148

DIAMETER(IN)

-

-

-

- -

-

-

NAILING SCHEDULECONNECTION NAILING

NAILING SCHEDULE REMARKS:1. COMMON OR BOX NAILS MAY BE USED EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE STATED.2. NAILS SPACED AT 6 INCHES (152mm) ON CENTER AT EDGES, 12 INCHES (305mm) ATINTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS EXCEPT 6 INCHES (152mm) AT ALL SUPPORTS WHERESPANS ARE 48 INCHES (1219mm) OR MORE. FOR NAILING OF WOOD STRUCTURALPANEL AND PARTICLE BOARD DIAPHRAGMS AND SHEAR WALLS, REFER TO GENERALSTRUCTURAL NOTES. NAILS FOR WALL SHEATHING MAY BE COMMON, OR BOX.3. SINKER.4. COMMON.5. DEFORMED SHANK6. CORROSION-RESISTANT SIDING (6d-1 7/8"x0.106"; 8d-2 3/8"x0.128") ORCASING (6d-2"x0.099"; 8d-2 1/2"x0.113") NAILS.

3-8d2-8d16d @ 16" (406mm)OC3-16d PER 16" (406mm)2-16d4-8d, TOE NAIL OR 2-16d END NAIL16d @ 24" (610mm)OC16d @ 16" (406mm)OC8-16d3-8d8d @ 6" (152mm)OC2-16d16-8d @ 16" (406mm)OC ALONG EACH EDGE3-8d4-8d3-16d3-16d3-8d2-8d16d @ 24" (610mm)OC20d @ 32" (813mm)OC @ TOP AND BOTTOM,STAGGERED AT ENDS AND AT EACH SPLICE2-16d AT EACH BEARING-

8d10d

6d8d

1. JOIST TO SILL OR GIRDER, TOE NAIL2. BRIDGING TO JOIST, TOE NAIL EACH END 3. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, TYPICAL FACE NAIL SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, AT BRACED WALL PANELS 4. TOP PLATE TO STUD, END NAIL5. STUD TO SOLE PLATE6. DOUBLE STUDS, FACE NAIL7. DOUBLE TOP PLATES, TYPICAL FACE NAIL DOUBLE TOP PLATES, LAP SPLICE8. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO TOP PLATE, TOE NAIL9. RIM JOIST TO TOP PLATE, TOE NAIL10. TOP PLATES, LAPS AND INTERSECTIONS, FACE NAIL11. CONTINUOUS HEADER, TWO PIECES12. CEILING JOISTS TO PLATE, TOE NAIL13. CONTINUOUS HEADER TO STUD, TOE NAIL14. CEILING JOISTS, LAPS OVER PARTITIONS, FACE NAIL15. CEILING JOISTS TO PARALLEL RAFTERS, FACE NAIL16. RAFTER TO PLATE, TOE NAIL17. 1" (25mm) BRACE TO EACH STUD AND PLATE, FACE NAIL18. BUILT-UP CORNER STUDS19. BUILT-UP GIRDER AND BEAMS

20. 2" (51mm) PLANKS21. WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS AND COMBINATION SUB-FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT (TO FRAMING), SUBFLOOR AND WALL SHEATHING (TO FRAMING): 5/8" AND LESS 21/32" - 1 1/4"22. PANEL SIDING (TO FRAMING) 1/2" (12.7mm) OR LESS 5/8" (16mm)

REMARKS

--3-33333--33--33--3-

-2

44266

COMMONWIRE NAIL

DIAMETER(IN)

DIAMETER(IN)

-

FLOOR JOISTS OR ROOF TRUSSES

EDGE NAILING

PLYWOOD: FACE GRAINTO RUN AT 90° TO JOISTS

WALL

FIELD NAILING

NOTES:1. ALL PLYWOOD SHEETS TO BE 4'-0"X8'-0" EXCEPT

WHERE JOB CONDITIONS PROHIBIT. MINIMUMDIMENSION OF ANY PIECE OF PLYWOOD SHALL BE 24".

2. NAILING PER SCHEDULE. 3. SHEATHING PER SCHEDULE.4. LONG DIMESION OF PLYWOOD SHALL RUN ACROSS

JOISTS OR RAFTERS.5. NAILS SHALL HAVE A MIN. 3/8" EDGE DISTANCE &

SHALL NOT BE OVER-DRIVEN THROUGH OUTER FACE.

DESCRIPTION

MATERIALLOCATION

1/2" SHEATHING

ROOF

FLOOR

1/2" SHEATHING

BLOCKED

NO

NO

NAILING REQUIREMENTS

SIZE PANEL EDGE

16d 6"

16d 6"

GLUED

NO

NO

DOUBLE HEADERMATCHING JOISTS PERPLAN

FLOOR/ROOF JOISTSPER PLAN

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL JOISTALONG SIDE OF OPENINGWHERE SHOWN ON PLANS -SEE PLANS FOR SIZE

JOIST HANGERS:SIMPSON LUS28-2 @ 2x12 JOISTSSIMPSON LUS410 @ LVL JOISTS

PLAN VIEW

4'-0" MAX

5'-0

" M

AX

SEE MECHANICAL ANDARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGSFOR OPENING DIMENSION1'-4" MAX

1' - 4"

DR

AW

ING

S F

OR

OP

EN

ING

DIM

EN

SIO

N

3'-0

" M

AX

SE

E M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

AN

D A

RC

HIT

EC

TU

RA

L

FLOOR/ ROOF JOIST

2x4 WITH SIMPSON LUS24HANGER EACH END

PLAN VIEW

FLOOR/ ROOF JOIST

BOND BEAM

NAIL SIZE AND SPACINGPER DIAPHRAGM EDGENAILING REQUIREMENTS

TOP OF LEDGEREL

SEE PLAN

FLOOR / ROOFSHEATHING

WOOD JOISTSSEE PLANS

3/4"Ø HEADED ANCHORBOLTSAND WASHERS @ 2'-8" OC WITHMINIMUM 6" EMBEDMENT(DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS)

CMU WALL

(AT MASONRY WALL)

LEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTEDMEMBER SIZE, SPECIES ANDGRADE

2x BLOCKING @ 1'-4" OC

30# ASPHALTIC PAPER BETWEENWOOD LEDGER & MASONRY

EQ

EQ

GROUT MIN 8" ABOVEAND BELOW ANCHORBOLTS

(AT MASONRY WALL)

BOND BEAM

WOOD JOISTS,SEE PLAN

NAIL SIZE AND SPACING PERDIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILINGREQUIREMENTS

FLOOR / ROOF SHEATHING

JOIST HANGER, SEE SCHEDULE

TOP OF LEDGEREL

SEE PLAN

CMU WALLLEDGER TO MATCH SUPPORTEDMEMBER SIZE, SPECIES ANDGRADE

HEADED ANCHORBOLTS ANDWASHERS WITH MINIMUM 6"EMBEDMENT, SEE SCHEDULE(DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS)


GROUT MINIMUM 8"ABOVE AND BELOWANCHOR BOLTS

EQ

EQ

SIMPSON PA18 STRAP WITH 6"MIN EMBEDMENT @ EXTENTSOF ELEVATOR WALL

#4 REBAR @ EXTENTSOF ELEVATOR WALL

FLOOR OR ROOFSHEATHING

TOS EL

SEE PLANS

2x BLOCKING

STEEL BEAM

8" 8"

(AT STEEL BEAM)

1/2"Ø BOLTS @ 2'-8" OCCOUNTERSUNK

SIMPSON A34EACH BLOCK

SIMPSON A34 EACHSIDE STAGGERRED

END OF FLOOROR ROOF JOIST

END OF OPPOSITEFLOOR OR ROOF JOIST

2x8 TOP PLATE

ROOF JOIST OR BLOCKINGBETWEEN JOISTS @ 4’-0” OC

SIMPSON DTC @ 4’-0” OC. INSTALLWITH 1/4” GAP BETWEEN WALLTOP PLATE AND ROOF JOIST

TOP PLATE OR TRACKOF NON-BEARINGSTUD WALL

GAP


TOS EL

SEE PLANS

STEEL BEAM

(AT STEEL BEAM)


SIMPSON LB212AZJOIST HANGER

FLOOR OR ROOF JOIST

2x8 TOP PLATE

NOTE: USE SIMPSON WNP212-2 JOIST HANGER AT DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS USE SIMPSON LBV1.81/11.25 JOIST HANGER FOR 1 3/4x11 1/4 LVLs AT RTU OPENINGS

SIMPSON H2.5A TIE

STEEL BEAM


FLOOR OR ROOF JOIST

1/4 3@1'-0"

L8x8x1/2xCONTINUOUS

FLOOR ORROOF JOIST



2x BLOCKING



2x8 TOP PLATE

3/8" STIFFENER PL@ 4'-0" OC

1/43 SIDES

TOS EL

SEE PLANS

2 - 2x8 TOP PLATES

2x BLOCKING

SIMPSON A34AT BLOCKING


TOS EL

SEE PLANS

2x BLOCKING

STEEL BEAM

8" 8"

(AT 213 OUTDOOR SEATING)



SIMPSON H2.5A EACHSIDE STAGGERRED


END OF OPPOSITEFLOOR OR ROOF JOIST

2 - 2x8 TOP PLATES

TOS EL

SEE PLANS

FLOOR OR ROOFSHEATHING2x BLOCKING

STEEL BEAM




2 - 2x8 TOP PLATES

SIMPSON H2.5AEACH SIDE

ARCHSEE

1" 7" 7" 1"

A

ADETAIL

BRICK VENEER

1/4 4.5"

3/16

1/4" STIFFENER PLATE

L8x8x1/2x1'-4" LONG

STEEL COLUMN

STEEL COLUMN

L8x8x1/2x1'-4" LONG

1/4" STIFFENER PLATE

1/4

(AT EXISTING BRICK WALL)




SIMPSON LUS28 JOIST HANGER AT2x12 JOISTS;SIMPSON HU9 JOIST HANGER AT1 3/4x14 LVL JOISTS

TOP OF LEDGEREL

SEE PLAN

EXISTINGBRICK WALL



3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV)ADHESIVE THREADED ANCHORS@ 1'-4" OC WITH MINIMUM 8"EMBEDMENT

NOTE: JOIST HANGERS TO BE:- SIMPSON WNP212-12 @ DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS- SIMPSON LUS410 @ DOUBLE LVL JOISTS

EQ

EQ


TOP OF LEDGEREL

SEE PLAN




2x BLOCKING @ 1'-4" OC



3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV)ADHESIVE THREADEDANCHORS @ 2'-8" OC WITHMINIMUM 8" EMBEDMENT

EXISTINGBRICK WALL

EQ

EQTOS EL

SEE PLANS

FLOOR OR ROOFSHEATHING2x BLOCKING

STEEL BEAM




2x8 TOP PLATE

ARCHSEE

SIMPSON A34EACH SIDE

BRICK MASONRY WALL(EXISTING)

2-L8x6x1/2 (LLH). PROVIDE8" BEARING ON MASONRYJAMBS.

1/4" BOTTOM PLATE xWIDTH OF OPENING,BETWEEN JAMBS.

BOTTOM EL

SEE PLANS

3/16 3 @ 1'-0"

3/16 3 @ 1'-0"

NOTES: (CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE)1. SAW CUT HORIZONTAL SLOTS IN WALL. EXTEND CUTS 8" FROM EDGE

OF INTENDED OPENING AT EACH END.2. INSTALL ANGLES. ANGLES SHALL EXTEND 8" FROM EDGE OF

INTENDED OPENING AT EACH END.3. DEMO WALL FOR NEW OPENING.

GALVANIZE STEEL ATEXTERIOR APPLICATIONS

FIELD VERIFY 1' - 9"

1/2" 1/2"

(FV)1' - 0"

RE

Q'D

SP

LIC

E

EXISTINGBRICK WALL

MIN8"

EXTERIOR FACEOF BUILDING BOND BEAMS

@ 4'-0" OC

DRILL AND EPOXYDOWELS INTOEXISTING WALL ATEACH BOND BEAM

EXTEND BONDBEAMS 4'-0" INTOBUILDING WALL

NOTES: (CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE)1. LOCATE POSITION OF NEW COLUMN.2. DOUBLE UP JOISTS ON EITHER SIDE OF JOISTS TO BE CUT.3. SUPPORT EXISTING FLOOR JOISTS, CUT BACK FROM COLUMN CENTERLINE,

INSTALL HEADERS WITH HANGERS TO SUPPORT CUT JOISTS.4. CUT OPENING FOR NEW COLUMN IN EXISTING FLOOR

AND INSTALL COLUMN TO MASONRY PIER AND STEEL FRAMING.5. ADD BLOCKING BETWEEN HEADERS ON EACH SIDE OF COLUMN AND BOLT TO COLUMN.6. REPLACE SUBFLOOR AND NAIL TO NEW BLOCKING AND JOISTS.

BASE PLATE AND MASONRYPIER BELOW

EXISTING JOIST CUT BACK AT COLUMN

NEW JOIST SISTERED NEXT TO EXISTING

2-2x12 HEADER WITH SIMPSON LUS28-2

L3x3x1/4x0'-4" WITH 1/2"Ø A325-N BOLT

2x12 BLOCKING

STEEL COLUMN

3/16

MASONRY WALL

JOIST OR BLOCKING BETWEENJOIST @ 2'-0" OC

2-2x4xCONTINUOUS WITH 2-16dNAILS TO JOIST OR BLOCKING.FASTEN 2x4 TOGETHER WITH2-10d NAILS @ 12" OC

BOND BEAM

FLOOR OR ROOF SHEATHING

1" C

LR

2x FLOOR JOISTS @ 1'-4" OC

EXISTING 2x12 JOISTS

EXISTING SUBFLOOR ANDWOOD FLOORING TO REMAIN(FIELD VERIFY)

3/4" PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR

ROOF SHEATHING

TOP OF JOIST EL

SEE PLANS

CMU WALL

(AT MASONRY WALL)

5/8"Ø x 12" ANCHORBOLTS @ 2'-0" OCCOUNTERSUNK

SIMPSON LB212AZJOIST HANGER

ROOF JOIST

2x TOP PLATE

NOTE: USE SIMPSON WNP212-2 JOIST HANGER AT DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS

VERTICAL MASONRY WALLREINFORCING WITH STANDARDHOOK AT TOP

BOND BEAM

30# ASPHALTIC PAPERBETWEEN WOOD ANDMASONRY

JOIST HANGER SCHEDULEJOIST SIZE HANGER TYPE ANCHOR Ø BOLT SPACING

2x12 SIMPSON LUS28 3/4" 16" OC

3x12 SIMPSON LUS310 7/8" 16" OC

1 3/4"x14" LVL SIMPSON HU9 3/4" 8" OC

NOTE: JOIST HANGERS TO BE:- SIMPSON WNP212-12 @ DOUBLE 2x12 JOISTS- SIMPSON LUS410 @ DOUBLE LVL JOISTS

(AT MASONRY WALL)

BOND BEAM




JOIST HANGER, SEE SCHEDULE

TOP OF LEDGEREL

SEE PLAN

CMU WALL

DOUBLE LEDGER TO MATCHSUPPORTED MEMBER SIZE,SPECIES AND GRADE

HEADED ANCHORBOLTS ANDWASHERS WITH MINIMUM 6"EMBEDMENT, SEE SCHEDULE(DO NOT COUNTERSINK NUTS)


GROUT MINIMUM 8"ABOVE AND BELOWANCHOR BOLTS

EQ

EQ

SIMPSON LTT19 TIE W/1/2" Ø TITEN HD SCREWANCHOR AT EXTENTSOF ELEVATOR WALL


TOP OF EXISTWALL

111'-4 1/2" (FV)



3x12 CONTINUOUS TOP PLATE


3/4"Ø HILTI HY-70 (OR EQUIV)ADHESIVE THREADED ANCHORS@ 2'-0" OC WITH MINIMUM 8"EMBEDMENT

EXISTING BRICK WALL.CONTRACTOR REMOVE TOPOF EXISTING WALL TO INSTALLTOP PLATE. PROVIDE CLEAN,SMOOTH BEARING SURFACE

30# ASPHALTIC PAPERBETWEEN WOOD TOPPLATE AND EXISTINGMASONRY

(AT PIPE PERPENDICULAR TO WOOD JOIST)

WOOD JOIST

PIPE SUPPORT - SEEMECHANICAL DRAWINGSAND SPECIFICATIONS

SPACE PIPE SUPPORTS SUCH THATMAXIMUM CONCENTRATED LOAD AT JOISTDOES NOT EXCEED 150#


2" M

AX

1" M

IN

WOOD JOIST


2-2x4 SANDWICHED AROUNDHANGER RODS WITH 2-16dNAILS EACH END

PIPE SUPPORT - SEEMECHANICAL DRAWINGSAND SPECIFICATIONS.SPACE PIPE SUPPORTSSUCH THAT MAXIMUM LOADDOES NOT EXCEED 150#

DOUBLE NUT AND WASHERABOVE AND BELOW

(AT PIPE PARALLEL TO WOOD JOIST)

Arc

hite

ctu

re E

ngin

eering

P

lan

nin

g In

teriors

©

,

DL

R G

rou

p inc., a

Ne

bra

ska

co

rpo

ratio

n, A

LL

RIG

HT

S R

ES

ER

VE

D

Rev

isio

ns

3/3

0/2

018 1

:09:3

2 P

M

C:\R

evit\1

0-1

7138-0

0_S

T_2016_jb

erg

ren.r

vt

10-1

7138-0

0

03/2

3/2

018

GLA

CIA

L T

ILL T

AS

TIN

G R

OO

M

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL D

ET

AIL

SS6.1

1419 S

ILV

ER

ST

RE

ET

AS

HLA

ND

, N

E 6

8003

20

18

RE

NO

VA

TIO

N A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

NO SCALES6.1

15 NAILING SCHEDULENO SCALES6.1

13 TYP DIAPHRAGM NAILING DETAILNO SCALES6.1

14 DIAPHRAGM SCHEDULE

NO SCALES6.1

22 TYP LARGE FLOOR/ROOF OPENING

NO SCALES6.1

42 TYP SMALL FLOOR/ROOF OPENING

NO SCALES6.1

12 TYP FRAMING DETAILNO SCALES6.1

11 TYP FRAMING DETAIL

NO SCALES6.1

23 JOIST BEARING DETAIL

NO SCALES6.1

35 TYP NON-BEARING WALL DETAIL

NO SCALES6.1


NO SCALES6.1


NO SCALES6.1


NO SCALES6.1


NO SCALES6.1

51 BRICK SUPPORT AT STEEL COLUMN

NO SCALES6.1




NO SCALES6.1

52 LOOSE LINTEL DETAILNO SCALES6.1

53 TYP INTERSECTION

NO SCALES6.1

36 COLUMN BRACING DETAIL

NO SCALES6.1

41 TYP NON-BEARING WALL DETAILSCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"S6.1

43 FLOOR FRAMING DETAIL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"S6.1


NO SCALES6.1

45 JOIST HANGER SCHEDULE

NO SCALES6.1


SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"S6.1


NO SCALES6.1

54 TYP PIPE SUPPORT DETAILNO SCALES6.1

55 TYP PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL

CC

-13/

30/1

8

CC-1

CC-1

Date post:	09-May-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	phamquynh
View:	239 times
Download:	11 times